Table of Contents MOBYR F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual 6GT2 497-4BA00-0EA2 Published in November 2006 General 1 Introduction to MOBY F 2 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Mobile Data Memories Read/Write Devices Read/Write Antennas 3 4 5 Interfaces 6 Accessories 7 Documentation A Error Messages B ASCII Table C Safety Guidelines This manual contains notices which you should observe to ensure your own personal safety, as well as to protect the product and connected equipment. These notices are highlighted in the manual by a warning triangle and are marked as follows according to the level of danger: ! Danger ! Warning ! Caution indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage will result if proper precautions are not taken. indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. indicates that minor personal injury or property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. Caution indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. Note draws your attention to particularly important information on the product, handling the product, or to a particular part of the documentation. Qualified Personnel The device/system may only be set up and operated in conjunction with this manual. Only qualified personnel should be allowed to install and work on this equipment. Qualified persons are defined as persons who are authorized to commission, to ground, and to tag circuits, equipment, and systems in accordance with established safety practices and standards. Correct Usage ! Note the following: Warning This device and its components may only be used for the applications described in the catalog or the technical description, and only in connection with devices or components from other manufacturers which have been approved or recommended by Siemens. This product can only function correctly and safely if it is transported, stored, set up, and installed correctly, and operated and maintained as recommended. Trademarks MOBYR, SIMATICR and SINECR are trademarks of SIEMENS AG. Some of the other designations used in these documents are also registered trademarks; the owner's rights may be violated if they are used by third parties for their own purposes. Copyright E Siemens AG 1998 All rights reserved Disclaimer of Liability The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its contents is not permitted without express written authority. Offenders will be liable for damages. All rights, including rights created by patent grant or registration of a utility model or design, are reserved. We have checked the contents of this manual for agreement with the hardware and software described. Since deviations cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full agreement. However, the data in this manual are reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections included in subsequent editions. Suggestions for improvement are welcomed. Siemens AG Automation and Drives Special Products, Projects Automotive Industry, Training P.O. Box 4848, D-90327 Nuernberg Siemens Aktiengesellschaft E Siemens AG 1998, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2005, 2006 Technical data subject to change. Order No. 6GT2 497-4BA00-0EA2 Table of Contents 1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 2 Introduction to MOBY F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 3 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 3.1 3.1.1 3.1.2 3.1.3 3.1.4 3.1.5 Basic Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmission Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmit Period of the MDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Communication between ASM, SLG/SLA and MDS F4xx . . . . . . . . . . . . . Communication between ASM and User Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sample Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 3-3 3-6 3-7 3-8 3-9 3.2 Field Data of MDS and SLG/SLA/SIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 3.3 Relationship of Speed to Amount of Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14 3.4 3.4.1 3.4.2 3.4.3 3.4.4 Installation Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Metal-Free Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Effects on the Transmission Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reduction of Metallic Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chemical Resistance of the Mobile Data Memories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16 3-16 3-19 3-24 3-27 3.5 3.5.1 3.5.2 3.5.3 3.5.4 3.5.5 3.5.6 3.5.7 3.5.8 3.5.9 3.5.10 EMC Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spreading of Interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The FFT Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabinet Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Avoiding Interference Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipotential Bonding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ground Fault Monitoring with MOBY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shielding the Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Rules on EMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29 3-29 3-30 3-31 3-34 3-36 3-39 3-40 3-41 3-42 3-44 3.6 Concept of MOBY Shielding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46 3.7 3.7.1 3.7.2 3.7.3 3.7.4 Cable and Plug Connector Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plug Connector Allocations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48 3-48 3-49 3-53 3-58 Mobile Data Memories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 4.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 4.2 MDS F124 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 4.3 MDS F125 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 4.4 MDS F160 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 4.5 MDS F415 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13 4 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 i Table of Contents 5 Read/Write Devices Read/Write Antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 5.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 5.2 SLG 80 ANT F5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 5.3 SLG 82 Basic Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 5.4 SLG 82 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 5.5 SLA 81 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21 5.6 SLA 82 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 6.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 6.2 6.2.1 6.2.2 6.2.3 ASM 400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hardware Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SIMATIC S5 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 6-4 6-8 6-11 6.3 ASM 410 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15 6.4 ASM 450/452 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24 6.5 ASM 470/475 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35 6.6 ASM 473 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46 6.7 ASM 824/850/854 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-54 6.8 6.8.1 6.8.2 6.8.3 6.8.4 6.8.5 Serial Interface Module - SIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable and Plug Connector Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Programming the SIM Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SIM 80 ANT F5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SIM 82 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-61 6-61 6-68 6-74 6-75 6-82 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 7.1 MOBY Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 7.2 MOBY Wide Range Power Pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 7.3 MOBY Hand-Held Terminal STG F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 A Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1 B Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1 B.1 General Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2 B.2 B.2.1 B.2.2 B.2.3 ASM-Related Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ASM 400 with FB 250 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ASM 470 with FB 47/FC 47 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ASM 450 with FB 240 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5 B-5 B-7 B-9 ASCII Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1 6 7 C ii MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Table of Contents Figures 2-1 3-1 3-2 3-3 3-4 3-5 3-6 3-7 3-8 3-9 3-10 3-11 3-12 3-13 3-14 3-15 3-16 3-17 3-18 3-19 3-20 3-21 3-22 3-23 3-24 3-25 3-26 3-27 3-28 3-29 3-30 3-31 3-32 3-33 3-34 3-35 3-36 3-37 3-38 3-39 3-40 3-41 4-1 4-2 4-3 4-4 4-5 4-6 4-7 4-8 4-9 Overview of MOBY F components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmission window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direction of movement of the MDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working in static operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working in dynamical operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tolerances of the side allowance of the pallet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tolerance of the side allowance of the pallet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SLG 80 ANT F5 with MDS F415 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SLA 81 with MDS F415 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SLA 82 with MDS F415 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Isolated mounting of ANT F5 on metal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SLA 81 mounted in metal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flush mounting in metal: SLA 82 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MDS in metal-free environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MDS in metallic environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interfering metal support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flush installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spreading of interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The four kinds of interference coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shielding via housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Avoidance of interference via optimal layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Filtering the supply voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inductive interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipotential bonding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuit diagram of the principle of grounding fault monitoring . . . . . . . . . . SIMATIC PLC 100U with ASM 410 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shielding of the cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection of the shield rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interruption of shielded cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Simple layout with ASM 400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Layout of the ASM 470 with shield connecting element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Baring of the cable shield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection cable: ASM 400 SLG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection cable: ASM 410 SLG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection cable: ASM 450/452/473 SLG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection cable: ASM 470/475 SLG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection cable: PC SIM 80 ANT F5 (not for SIM 82) . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting cable RS 232 PC SLG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection cable, RS 232 PC SIM 82/ASM 824 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection cable, SLG/SIM 82; ASM 824/850/854 SLA 81/SLA 82 . . Extension cable, SLG/SIM 82; ASM 824/850/854 SLA 81/SLA 82 . . . 24 V DC stub line SLG/SIM/ASM MOBY wide-range power pack . . . . MDS F124 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions of the MDS F124 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Metal-free space for the MDS F124 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MDS F125 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions of the MDS F125 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Metal-free space for the MDS F125 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MDS F160 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions of the MDS F160 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Metal-free space for the MDS F160 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 2-2 3-3 3-4 3-4 3-5 3-9 3-10 3-14 3-14 3-15 3-17 3-17 3-18 3-22 3-23 3-24 3-25 3-31 3-33 3-36 3-37 3-38 3-39 3-40 3-41 3-41 3-42 3-43 3-43 3-46 3-47 3-47 3-53 3-53 3-54 3-54 3-55 3-55 3-56 3-56 3-57 3-57 4-4 4-5 4-6 4-7 4-8 4-9 4-10 4-11 4-12 iii Table of Contents 4-10 4-11 4-12 5-1 5-2 5-3 5-4 5-5 5-6 5-7 5-8 5-9 5-10 5-11 5-12 5-13 5-14 5-15 5-16 5-17 5-18 5-19 5-20 5-21 5-22 5-23 5-24 5-25 5-26 5-27 5-28 5-29 5-30 5-31 5-32 5-33 6-1 6-2 6-3 6-4 6-5 6-6 6-7 6-8 6-9 6-10 6-11 6-12 6-13 6-14 6-15 6-16 6-17 iv MDS F415 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions of the MDS F415 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Metal-free space for the MDS F415 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Read/write device SLG 80 ANT F5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmission window of the SLG 80 ANT F5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Metal-free space for SLG 80 ANT F5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Distance D for SLG 80 ANT F5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensional diagram of SLG 80 ANT F5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensional drawing of the spacer kit for MOBY F ANT F5 . . . . . . . . . . . Installation drawing for spacer kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Read/write, SLG 82 basic device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Serial interface of the SLG 82 basic device to the SLA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Serial interfaces of the SLG 82 basic device to the user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensional drawing of SLG 82 basic device without mounting holes . . . Mounting drawing of the adapter floor plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Read/write device SLG 82 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmission window of SLG 82 with SLA 81 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Metal-free space for SLG 82 with SLA 81 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Distance D: SLG 82 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Serial interface of SLG 82 to SLA 81 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Serial interface of SLG 82 to user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing of SLG 82's housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing of antenna for SLG 82 (SLA 81) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing of mounting of adapter floor plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Read/write device SLA 81 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmission window of SLA 81 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Metal-free space for SLA 81 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Distance D: SLA 81 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensional drawing of SLA 81 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensional drawing of the mounting clamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing of mounting of SLA 81 with mounting clamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SLA 82 read/write antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmission window of the SLA 82 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Metal-free area of SLA 82 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Distance D: SLA 82 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensional drawing of SLA 82 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configurator of ASM 400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plug connectors and their assignment for ASM 400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switches and plug-in jumpers for ASM 400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings on the channel module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CR 700-0LA module rack (S5-115U) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CR 700-0LB module rack (S5-115U) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CR 700-1 module rack (S5-115U) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CR 700-2 module rack (S5-115U) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CR 700-3 module rack (S5-115U) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ER 701-3 module rack (S5-115U) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S5-135U/-155U central controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S5-155U/-155H central controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EG S5-183U expansion device for S5-135U/-155U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EG S5-184U expansion device for S5-135U/155U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EG S5-185U expansion device for S5-135U/155U/155H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EG S5-187U expansion device for S5-135U/155U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configurator for ASM 410 in SIMATIC S5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13 4-15 4-15 5-3 5-6 5-6 5-7 5-8 5-9 5-10 5-11 5-13 5-13 5-14 5-14 5-15 5-17 5-17 5-18 5-18 5-19 5-19 5-20 5-20 5-21 5-23 5-23 5-24 5-24 5-25 5-25 5-26 5-28 5-28 5-29 5-29 6-4 6-8 6-9 6-10 6-11 6-11 6-11 6-12 6-12 6-12 6-13 6-13 6-13 6-14 6-14 6-14 6-15 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Table of Contents 6-18 6-19 6-20 6-21 6-22 6-23 6-24 6-25 6-26 6-27 6-28 6-29 6-30 6-31 6-32 6-33 6-34 6-35 6-36 6-37 6-38 6-39 6-40 6-41 6-42 6-43 6-44 6-45 6-46 6-47 6-48 6-49 6-50 6-51 6-52 6-53 6-54 6-55 6-56 6-57 6-58 6-59 6-60 6-61 6-62 6-63 6-64 6-65 6-66 6-67 6-68 Configurator for ASM 410 in ET 100U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ASM 410 interface with operational and indicator elements . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring of one or two SLGs for ASM 410 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ASM 450/452 interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configurator of ASM 450/452 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection plug, ASM 450/452 SLG (6GT2 090-0BC00) . . . . . . . . . . . Connection cable, ASM 450/452 SLG (6GT2 491-1C...) . . . . . . . . . . . . PROFIBUS cable with 24 V power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SLG and DI/DO configuration for ASM 450/452 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensional drawing of the ASM 450/452 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pin allocation and LEDs of ASM 450/452 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Length of baring for a PROFIBUS cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the PROFIBUS address and circuiting the terminating resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ASM 470/475 interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configurator for ASM 470/475 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front plate and inside of the front door of the ASM 470/475 . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring of ASM 470/475 to SLG (6GT2 091-0E...) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Baring of the cable shield when customer makes own cable . . . . . . . . . . . ASM 470/475 directory in the hardware catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ASM 473 interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configurator for an ASM 473 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maximum configuration of ASM 473 on an ET 200X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pin asssignment and LEDs of ASM 473 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions for mounting holes for basic and expansion modules. . . . . . . ASM 824/850/854 interface module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configurator for ASM 824, ASM 850 (only with 1 x SLA 8x) and ASM 854 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Serial interfaces of the ASM 824/850/854 to SLA 81 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Serial interface of ASM 824/850/854 to user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing of ASM 824/850/854 with mounting holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing of adapter floor plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example of a configuration for SIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration byte 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration byte 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standard cabling for computer/SIM 80 ANT F5, RS 232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standard cabling for computer/SIM 82, RS 232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standard cabling for computer/SIM 82, RS 422 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DI/DO cabling with voltage supply for SIM 80 ANT F5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SIM 80 ANT F5 serial interface module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmission window of the SIM 80 ANT F5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Metal-free space for SIM 80 ANT F5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Distance D for SIM 80 ANT F5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensional diagram of SIM 80 ANT F5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Serial interface module SIM 82 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmission window of SIM 82 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Metal-free space for SIM 82 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Distance D: SIM 82 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Serial interface of SIM 82 to SLA 81 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Serial interface of SIM 82 to user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensional drawing of the SIM 82 housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensional drawing of antenna for SIM 82 (SLA 81) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing of mounting of adapter floor plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 6-19 6-20 6-23 6-24 6-28 6-29 6-29 6-30 6-31 6-31 6-32 6-33 6-34 6-35 6-36 6-41 6-43 6-43 6-44 6-46 6-49 6-51 6-52 6-53 6-54 6-56 6-58 6-59 6-60 6-60 6-61 6-65 6-65 6-72 6-72 6-73 6-73 6-75 6-79 6-79 6-80 6-81 6-82 6-84 6-85 6-86 6-86 6-87 6-88 6-88 6-89 v Table of Contents 7-1 7-2 7-3 7-4 7-5 vi MOBY wide range power pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plug connector allocation of 24 V output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions of the MOBY wide range power pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MOBY STG F hand-held terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hardware of the STG F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 7-6 7-7 7-8 7-10 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Table of Contents Tables 2-1 3-1 3-2 3-3 3-4 3-5 3-6 3-7 3-8 3-9 3-10 3-11 3-12 3-13 3-14 3-15 3-16 3-17 3-18 3-19 3-20 3-21 3-22 3-23 3-24 3-25 4-1 4-2 4-3 4-4 4-5 4-6 4-7 4-8 4-9 4-10 4-11 4-12 Technical data of MOBY F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Constant time K and tByte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmission time of ID number MDS F1xx/MDS F4xx, starting at address 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maximum transversal speed for reading the ID number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Field data of all MDSs and SLGs/SLAs/SIMs (ANT F5 with 100-mm distance to metal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Minimum distance from MDS to MDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Minimum distance from antenna to antenna with MDS 4xx (r/w) . . . . . . . Minimum distance from antenna to antenna with MDS 1xx (r/o) . . . . . . . . Reduction of field data in %: MDS and SLG/SIM with ANT F5 (See figures 3-13/3-14.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reduction of the field data by mounting in metal (in %): MDS and SLG 82/SIM 82/SLA 81 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reduction of the field data by mounting in metal (in %): MDS with SLA 82 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chemical resistance of data memories made of fiber glass reinforced epoxy resin (MDS F124/F125/F415) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interference sources: Origin and effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Causes of coupling paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameterization of the MOBY F operating modes for the FFT command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Voltage supply of the SLG/SIM 80 ANT F5 and SLG/SIM 82 . . . . . . . . . . Maximum ripple of the supply voltage for SLG/SIM 80 (based on frequency range) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plug connector allocation of the SLG/SIM 80 ANT F5/SLG 82 plug connector (pin housing side) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plug connector allocation of the 9-pole submin D (socket housing side) . Plug connector allocation of the 9-pole submin D (socket housing side) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plug connector allocation of SLA plug connector (pin housing side) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plug connector allocation of the 9-pole submin D (socket housing side) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering data for counterplug IP65 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plug connector allocation of 4-pole voltage supply plug connector (pin housing side) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering data for voltage supply plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering data for MOBY cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of the MDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operational requirements/environmental requirements of MDS . . . . . . . . Ordering data for MDS F124 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data of MDS F124 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Field data of MDS F124 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering data for MDS F125 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data of MDS F125 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Field data of MDS F125 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering data for MDS F160 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data for MDS F160 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Field data for MDS F160 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering data for MDS F415 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 2-1 3-7 3-7 3-8 3-11 3-12 3-12 3-13 3-19 3-20 3-21 3-27 3-32 3-33 3-35 3-48 3-49 3-49 3-50 3-50 3-51 3-51 3-51 3-52 3-52 3-58 4-2 4-3 4-4 4-4 4-5 4-7 4-7 4-8 4-10 4-10 4-11 4-13 vii Table of Contents 4-13 4-14 4-15 5-1 5-2 5-3 5-4 5-5 5-6 5-7 5-8 5-9 5-10 5-11 5-12 5-13 5-14 5-15 5-16 6-1 6-2 6-3 6-4 6-5 6-6 6-7 6-8 6-9 6-10 6-11 6-12 6-13 6-14 6-15 6-16 6-17 6-18 6-19 6-20 6-21 6-22 6-23 6-24 6-25 6-26 6-27 6-28 6-29 6-30 6-31 6-32 viii Technical data of MDS F415 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Memory organization of the MDS F4xx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Field data of MDS F415 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview table, SLG/SLA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering data for the SLG 80 ANT F5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data of SLG 80 ANT F5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Field data of SLG 80 ANT F5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering data for spacer kit MOBY F ANT F5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering data for the SLG 82 basic device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data of the SLG 82 basic device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering data of the SLG 82 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data of the SLG 82 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Field data of SLG 82 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering data of the SLA 81 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data of the SLA 81 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Field data of SLA 81 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering data of the SLA 82 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data of the SLA 82 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Field data of the SLA 82 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of the interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering data of ASM 400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data of ASM 400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Address settings for ASM 400 with FB 250/252 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering data of ASM 410 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data of ASM 410 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Status and error LEDs of ASM 410 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating modes for ASM 410 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering data for ASM 450/452 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data of ASM 450/452 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LEDs for PROFIBUS diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering data for ASM 470/475 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data of ASM 470/475 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Function of the LEDs on ASM 470/475 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Additional LEDs on the ASM 475 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering data of ASM 473 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data of ASM 473 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prerequsites for operation of the ASM 473 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering data of the ASM 824/850/854 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data of the ASM 824/850/854 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Memory organization for SIM 80 ANT F5 with MDS F4xx . . . . . . . . . . . . . Memory organization for SIM 82 with MDS F4xx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration of the delivered MDS F4xx transponders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Field data of all MDSs and SIMs without effects of metal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Minimum distance from MDS to MDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Minimum distance from antenna to antenna with MDS F4xx (r/w) . . . . . . Minimum distance from antenna to antenna with MDS F1xx (r/o) . . . . . . Plug connector allocation of the 9-pole submin D (pin housing side) . . . . Plug connector allocation of the 9-pole submin D (socket housing side) . Plug connector allocation of the 9-pole submin D (socket housing side) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plug connector allocation of SLA plug connector (pin housing side) . . . . Plug connector allocation of 4-pole voltage supply plug connector (pin housing side) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13 4-14 4-14 5-2 5-3 5-3 5-5 5-9 5-11 5-12 5-15 5-15 5-17 5-21 5-21 5-22 5-26 5-26 5-27 6-2 6-5 6-6 6-9 6-16 6-17 6-21 6-22 6-25 6-26 6-33 6-37 6-38 6-42 6-42 6-47 6-47 6-50 6-55 6-57 6-62 6-62 6-66 6-67 6-67 6-68 6-68 6-68 6-69 6-69 6-70 6-70 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Table of Contents 6-33 6-34 6-35 6-36 6-37 6-38 6-39 6-40 7-1 7-2 7-3 7-4 7-5 B-1 B-2 B-3 B-4 Voltage supply of the SIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Max. ripple of the supply voltage for SIM 80 ANT F5 (based on frequency range) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering data for the SIM 80 ANT F5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data of SIM 80 ANT F5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Field data of SIM 80 ANT F5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering data for SIM 82 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data of SIM 82 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Field data of SIM 82 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering data for MOBY software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering data for MOBY wide range power pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data of MOBY wide range power pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering data of STG F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data for STG F hand-held terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Error messags of FB 250 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Error messages of FB 47/FC 47 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Error messages of FB 240 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 6-71 6-71 6-75 6-76 6-77 6-82 6-82 6-84 7-4 7-5 7-5 7-11 7-11 B-2 B-5 B-7 B-9 ix Table of Contents x MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 1 General This configuration, installation and service manual will help you to plan and configure your MOBY F system. It covers the guidelines on configuration and installation and provides complete technical data on the individual components. Technical support The specialists of Technical Support are ready to advise and support you when you have questions on the functions and handling of our MOBY products. You can reach us around the clock anywhere in the world. Telephone: Fax: E-mail: Internet +49 (0) 180 5050-222 +49 (0) 180 5050-223 adsupport@siemens.com General news on MOBY F or an overview of our other identification systems are available on the Internet under the following address. http://www.siemens.de/moby MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 1-1 General 1-2 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 2 Introduction to MOBY F MOBY F is an RF identification system for optimization of material flow primarily in the sectors of storage, commissioning and logistics. This family of products includes powerful read/write devices (SLGs) which, together with mobile data memories (MDSs), permit wide read/write distances. The MDSs are available in both fixed-code and write-access EEPROM memories. As with all MOBY systems, the user-friendly link to the SIMATIC is provided by interface modules (ASMs). So-called serial interface modules (SIMs) are available for links to PCs, EDP systems and controllers other than SIMATIC. These modules are actually SLGs equipped with communications intelligence to which a documented communications protocol has been added to ensure a high degree of flexibility. Principal application areas MOBY F is primarily used when product, packaging and parts identification must be inductive (i.e., without contact), reliable and fast. Long read/write distances combined with the selection of the MDS model ensure a high degree of flexibility in the following fields. S Storage technology/commissioning S Logistics and distribution S Material flow control S Parts identification Technical data of MOBY F Table 2-1 Technical data of MOBY F Storage capacity MDS F4xx MDS F1xx Depending on type: 256-byte EEPROM1 40-bit fixed-code Data organization Address-oriented Protection rating IP65 to IP67 Operating temperature -25 to +100 C Data transmission speed (SLG - MDS) w 6 msec/byte read-accesses w 10 msec/byte write-accesses Read/write distance 0 to 420 mm Can be connected to SIMATIC S5/S7, PCs, EDP systems, PLCs of other manufacturers, and PROFIBUS 1 192-byte EEPROM can be used with SLG. 224-byte EEPROM can be used with SIM. MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 2-1 Introduction to MOBY F Overview of MOBY F components S MDS: (mobile data memory) S SLA: (read and write antenna) S SLG: (read/write device) S SIM: (serial interface module) S ASM: (interface module) S STG F: (service and test device) ASM 400/ CM 422 for SIMATIC S 115U S 135U S 155U/H S FB 250 ASM 410 for SIMATIC S 90U S 95U S 100U/H S ET 100/200 S FB 41 ASM 450/452 ASM 470/475 for for SIMATIC S PROFIBUS DP/ S S7-300 with DPV1 connection FC 47/FC 45 with FB/FC for S ET 200M with SIMATIC S5/S7 FB 47/FC 47 ASM 473 can be installed in ET 200X; Control via PROFIBUS DPV1 with FC 45 ASM 824 for connection to S PC S External controller S Computer SINUMERIK via serial interface PC/controller other than SIMATIC SIMs operated directly on the serial interface of the PC ASM 850/854 S PROFIBUS DPV1 connection with FC 45 for SIMATIC S7 Internal system interface RS 422 RS 422 RS 232 SLA 82 SLG 82 SLA 81 SIM 82 SLG 80 with ANT F5 SIM 80 with ANT F5 Inductive power/data transmission (125 kHz) SIEMENS MOBY F MDS F124 (r/o) Button SIEMENS SIEMENS MOBY F MOBY F SIEMENS MOBY F MDS F160 (r/o) Button MDS F125 (r/o) Disc MDS F415 (r/w) Disc Figure 2-1 Overview of MOBY F components 2-2 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 3 3-1 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.1 Basic Requirements ! Warning Do not make changes to the devices. Violation will invalidate interference emission certification (BZT, FCC), CE and the manufacturer's warranty. To choose the correct MOBY F components, apply the following criteria to your particular application: S Transmission distance (i.e., read/write distance) S The amount of data to be transferred S Metal-free spaces for MDS and SLG/SLA (antenna) S Static of dynamic transmission of the data S Speed for dynamic transmission S Tolerances of the tracking S Environmental conditions (e.g., moisture, temperature, chemical effects, and so on) S Maximum write frequency per MDS 3-2 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.1.1 Transmission Window The read/write device (i.e., SLG/SLA) generates an inductive alternating field. The field is strongest in the vicinity of the SLG and decreases in strength the further away from the SLG it moves. Distribution of the field depends on the layout and geometry of the antennas on the SLG/SLA and the MDS. MDS functionality requires a minimum field strength on the MDS achieved at a distance of Sg from the SLG/SLA. The figure below shows the transmission window between the MDS and the SLG/SLA. View of side L Transmission window SSSSSS SSSSSS SSSSSS SSSSSS SSSSSS SSSSSS SSSSSS SSSSSS SSSSSS SSSSSS SSSSSS SSSSSS Sa Sg MDS ANT F5 Metal plate (spacing kit) PI MDS View of top L Sa: Operating distance between MDS and SLG/SLA Sg: Limit distance (The limit distance is the maximum clearance between the top of the SLG and the top of the MDS at which the transmission will still function under normal conditions.) L: Length of a transmission window for vertical direction of movement of the MDS PI: Point of intersection of the symmetry axes of the MDS Figure 3-1 Transmission window The active field to the MDS is a circle. Cf. view of top. The MDS can be processed as soon as the point of intersection (IP) of the MDS enters the circle of the transmission window. Direction of MDS movement and rotation can be disregarded. The above figure also shows that operation in the area between Sa and Sg is possible. The greater the distance, the smaller the active working area becomes until it is reduced to one point at distance Sg. For this reason, only static operation should be used in the area between Sa and Sg. MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 3-3 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Direction of movement of the MDS SSSS SSSS SSSS SSSS SSSS The MDS and the SLG do not have a polarization axis (i.e., the MDS can come from any direction, assume any position and cross the transmission window). The data of the transmission window do not change. The active area is shown below. L or SSSSS SSSSS SSSSS SSSSS SSSSS or B L B Figure 3-2 B SSSSS SSSSS SSSSS SSSSS SSSSS L Direction of movement of the MDS Working in static operation When static operation is used, the MDS can be processed into the area of the limit distance (i.e., Sg). The MDS must be positioned exactly over the SLG/SLA as shown below. Transmission window SSSSSS SSSSSS SSSSSS SSSSSS SSSSSS SSSSSS MDS Sg ANT F5 Metal plate (spacing kit) Figure 3-3 3-4 Working in static operation MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Working in dynamic operation Transmission window SSSSSS SSSSSS SSSSSS SSSSSS SSSSSS SSSSSS ANT F5 MDS L View of top MDS Figure 3-4 Width of the transmission window Working in dynamical operation The following approximation formula applies to practical applications: B + 0.4 @ L B: Width of the transmission window L: Length of the transmission window The width of the transmission window (B) is particularly important for the tolerance of mechanical tracking. When B is maintained, the formula can be used without restriction for the transmit period. MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 3-5 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.1.2 Transmit Period of the MDS The transmit period is the time during which the MDS is located in the transmission window of an SLG/SLA. During this time, the SLG/SLA can exchange data with the MDS. The formula used to calculate the transmit period is shown below. tV + L @ 0.8[m] VMDS ms tV: Transmit period of the MDS L: Length of the transmission window VMDS: Speed of the data memory in dynamic operation 0.8: Constant factor. Compensates for temperature influences and production tolerances. During static operation, the transmit period can be any length of time. The transmit period must last at least as long as necessary to conclude communication with the MDS. During dynamic operation, the transmit period is determined by the system environment. The amount of data to be transferred must be adjusted to the transmit period or vice versa. General formula: t V w tK 3-6 tV : Transmit period of the data memory in the field of the SLG/SLA tK: Communication time between MDS and ASM MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.1.3 Communication between ASM, SLG/SLA and MDS F4xx Communication between ASM, SLG/SLA and MDS is asynchronous with a transmission speed of 19200 baud. General formula: t K + K)t Byte @ n Calculation of the maximum amount of user data: n max + t V-K t Byte tK: Communication time between ASM, SLG/SLA and MDS tV: Transmit period n: Amount of user data in bytes nmax: Maximum amount of user data in bytes during dynamic operation tbyte: Transmission time for 1 byte (cf. table 3-1) K: Constant. The constant represents an internal system time. It contains the time required for power buildup on the MDS and the time required for command transmission (cf. table 3-1). Table 3-1 Constant time K and tByte K [msec] tByte [msec] Operating Mode 180 6 Read MDS 180 10 Write MDS 180 5 Read MDS 270 6 Write MDS ASM with SLG ASM with SLA (ASM 854, 854 824 824, 850) This table applies to all commands. When a user command consists of several subcommands, the formula for tK must be applied to each subcommand. The tK calculation applies to interference-free transmission. When transmission is briefly interrupted due to external interference, the ASM continues the command automatically. Table 3-2 Transmission time of ID number MDS F1xx/MDS F4xx, starting at address 0 Size ID No. Read ID No. tK [msec] MDS F1xx 5 bytes 50 msec MDS F4xx 4 bytes 60 msec MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 3-7 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Table 3-3 3.1.4 Maximum transversal speed for reading the ID number VMDS with SIM/SLG 82/SLA 81 VMDS with SLA 82 VMDS with SLG/SIM 80 with ANT F5 MDS F124 1.1 m/sec 2 m/sec 4.5 m/sec MDS F125 1.1 m/sec 2 m/sec 4.5 m/sec MDS F160 0.9 m/sec 1.6 m/sec 3.7 m/sec MDS F415 0.9 m/sec 1.6 m/sec 3.7 m/sec Communication between ASM and User Program The time required for communication between ASM and user depends on the following factors. S Cycle time and type of programmable controller S Software used (FB 41, FB 47, FC 47, FB 240, FC 44, FC 45, FB 250) Communication between the ASM 400 and the user can be divided into three steps. a) The user issues a command and starts it. When the FB is called the next time, the command is transferred to the ASM and is acknowledged by the ASM. b) The ASM executes the command with the MDS. The user or the FBs are in wait status. Data communication with the MDS starts as soon as an MDS enters the transmission window of the SLG/SLA. The MDS data are stored intermediately on the ASM and checked for correctness. c) Communication of the ASM with the MDS has been concluded. When the FB is called the next time, the read data or the results of a write command are transferred from the ASM to the user. The user receives a finished message. See applicable documentation for the exact communication times between ASM and user. 3-8 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.1.5 Sample Calculation The customer application A conveyor system moves the pallets with the MDS at a maximum speed of VMDS = 1 m/sec. The following MOBY F components were selected. S ASM 400 (with FB 250) S SLG 80 ANT F5 S MDS F415 Task: a) Physical specifications are to be provided to the constructor of the plant. b) The maximum number of bytes in dynamic operation is to be provided to the programmer. For technical data of the components, see the tables in chapter 3.2 ("field data of MDS and SLG/SLA/SIM"). Tolerance of the height allowance of the pallet SSSSSS SS SSS SSSSSS SS SS SSS SS SS SSS S SS S SS S SSS S SS S SSSSS SSSS SSS SS Direction of movement Pallet H MDS ANT F5 0 < H < Sa Figure 3-5 (View of side) Castor conveyor 0 < H < 300 mm Tolerances of the side allowance of the pallet MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 3-9 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Tolerances of the side allowance of the pallet Direction of movement of the MDS MDS Middle line of the MDS and SLG ANT F5 Tolerance range of the side allowance B = Width of transmission window in dynamical operation B Figure 3-6 Tolerance of the side allowance of the pallet Minimum distance between antennas See table 3-6 for this value. Minimum distance between MDS and MDS See table 3-5 for this value. Maximum number of bytes t v + L * 0.8 + 0.28m * 0.8 + 0.224 sec + 224msec V MDS 1msec For normal operating mode, see table 3-1 for the values of K and tbyte. Calculation of nmax Read: tv * K + 224msec * 180msec + 7.33 a n + 7bytes max t Byte 6msec Write: tv * K + 224msec * 180msec + 4.40 a n + 4bytes max t Byte 10msec Up to 11 bytes can be read or 4 bytes can be written when the MDS passes by. 3-10 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.2 Field Data of MDS and SLG/SLA/SIM The following table shows the field data of all MOBY F MDS and SLG/SLA/ SIM components. This information makes it particularly easy to select an MDS and an SLG/SLA/SIM. All technical data are typical data and are valid for an ambient room temperature of 0 to +50 C, and a voltage supply of 22 V to 27 V DC. Tolerances of 20% are permitted due to manufacturing and temperature factors. Additional tolerances apply to the field data when the total voltage range of 20 V to 30 V DC is utilized on the SLG/SLA/SIM and/or the total temperature range is utilized on the MDS and SLG/SLA/SIM. Note To ensure optimal field data even in metallic surroundings, the ANT F5 is calibrated at the plant to a distance of 100 mm to metal. Table 3-4 Field data of all MDSs and SLGs/SLAs/SIMs (ANT F5 with 100-mm distance to metal) MDS MDS F124 MDS F125 MDF F160 MDS F415 SLG/SIM Length of the transmission window in mm (L) SLG/SIM 80 ANT F5 280 280 230 280 SLG/SIM 82 70 70 40 70 SLA 81 70 70 40 70 SLA 82 120 120 120 120 Width of the transmission window in mm (W) SLG/SIM 80 ANT F5 110 110 92 110 SLG/SIM 82 30 30 16 30 SLA 81 30 30 16 30 SLA 82 48 48 48 48 Working distance in mm (Sa) SLG/SIM 80 ANT F5 0 to 240 0 to 380 0 to 140 0 to 300 SLG/SIM 82 0 to 65 0 to 110 0 to 60 15 to 90 SLA 81 0 to 65 0 to 110 0 to 60 15 to 90 SLA 82 0 to 140 0 to 180 0 to 90 20 to 150 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 3-11 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Table 3-4 Field data of all MDSs and SLGs/SLAs/SIMs (ANT F5 with 100-mm distance to metal) MDS MDS F124 MDS F125 MDF F160 MDS F415 SLG/SIM Limit distance in mm (Sg) SLG/SIM 80 ANT F5 280 420 160 340 SLG/SIM 82 80 140 70 110 SLA 81 80 140 70 110 SLA 82 160 200 120 180 Note If the range on the SLG/SLA/SIM is not sufficient ... S Check power pack/switching power supply for interference. See chapters 3.5 and 3.7. S Monitor or other source of interference in the vicinity. See chapter 3.5. S Check metallic surroundings. See chapter 3.4. Table 3-5 Minimum distance from MDS to MDS MDS F124 MDS F125 MDS F160 MDS F415 w1m w1m w1m w1m1 SLG/SIM 82 w 0.3 m w 0.4 m w 0.3 m w1m SLA 81 w 0.3 m w 0.4 m w 0.3 m w1m SLA 82 w 0.6 m w 0.8 m w 0.6 m w1m SLG/SIM 80 with ANT F5 1 The minimum distance can be reduced for SIM 80 ANT F5 in multi-tag operation. The MDSs may be located next to each other, but overlapping is not permitted. Table 3-6 3-12 Minimum distance from antenna to antenna with MDS 4xx (r/w) SLG/ SIM 80 ANT F5 SLG/ SIM 82 SLA 81 SLA 82 SLG/SIM 80 with ANT F5 w5m w2m w2m w 3.5 m SLG/SIM 82 w2m w 1.2 m w 1.2 m w 1.6 m SLA 81 w2m w 1.2 m w 1.2 m w 1.6 m SLA 82 w 3.5 m w 1.6 m w 1.6 m w 2.5 m MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Table 3-7 Minimum distance from antenna to antenna with MDS 1xx (r/o) SLG/SIM 80 ANT F5 SLG/SIM 82 SLA 81 SLA 82 w 1.5 m w1m w1m w 1.2 m SLG/SIM 82 w1m w 0.4 m w 0.4 m w 0.8 m SLA 81 w1m w 0.4 m w 0.4 m w 0.8 m SLA 82 w 1.2 m w 0.8 m w 0.8 m w 1.2 m SLG/SIM 80 with ANT F5 Note The values listed in tables 3-6 and 3-7 must be adhered to. Non-adherence would affect the inductive fields. Data transmission time would increase to an unknown value, or a command would be terminated with errors. A test is recommended for critical applications. MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 3-13 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.3 Relationship of Speed to Amount of Data The curves shown below will simplify preliminary selection of the MDS and SLG MOBY F components for dynamic use. The table in chapter 3.1.3 was used to calculate the curves. The curves are valid for operation within the transmission window (L). V MDS (m/sec) (m/min) 1.33 80 1.17 70 1 60 0.83 50 0.67 40 0.5 30 0.33 20 0.16 10 Write MDS F415 Read MDS F415 0 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 Number of bytes (n) Figure 3-7 SLG 80 ANT F5 with MDS F415 V MDS (m/sec) (m/min) 0.33 20 0.27 16 0.20 12 0.13 8 0.07 4 Write MDS F415 Read MDS F415 0 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 Number of bytes (n) Figure 3-8 3-14 SLA 81 with MDS F415 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines V MDS (m/sec) (m/min) 0.75 45 0.67 40 0.58 35 0.50 30 0.42 25 0.33 20 0.25 15 0.17 10 0.08 5 Write MDS F415 Read MDS F415 0 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 Number of bytes (n) Figure 3-9 SLA 82 with MDS F415 Note For transversal speed for reading the ID number, see table 3-3. MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 3-15 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.4 Installation Guidelines The MDS and SLG/SLA/SIM are inductive devices. All types of metal (i.e., particularly iron and ferromagnetic materials) in the vicinity of these devices affect their operation. To ensure that the field data described in chapter 3.2 retain their validity, several points must be adhered to with respect to configuration and installation. S Minimum distance between two antennas (See tables 3-6/3-7 or chapter 5.) S Minimum distance to two adjacent data memories (See table 3-5 and chapter 4.) S Metal-free space with flush installation of SLG/SLA/SIM ANT F5 in metal S Installation of several antennas on metal frame or support The next few chapters will discuss how the identification system is affected when mounted in a metallic environment. 3.4.1 Metal-Free Space Metal-free space for MDS Direct installation of the MDS on metal or flush in metal is not permitted. The MDS loses all its functions if mounted directly on metal. For the minimum distance of the MDS to metal, see the applicable paragraphs on metal-free space in chapter 4. Metal-free space for SLG/SIM 3-16 When installing the SLG/SIM, remember that metal in the vicinity of the antennas can affect field data. Typical distances to metal are indicated in the sections on metal-free space in chapters 5 and 6.8. MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines ANT F5 The ANT F5 must be insulated (i.e., direction installation on metal is not permitted). The maximum field data (no interference = 100%) apply when antenna ANT F5 is mounted 100 mm from metal. Metal h = 100 mm (non-metallic spacer) Figure 3-10 The SLA 81 antenna can be mounted in metal as shown in the following drawing. Remember to consider possible reduction of the field data (see chap. 3.4.2). IIIIIIIIIII IIIIIIIIIII IIIIIIIIIII IIIIIIIIIII IIIIIIIIIII IIIIIIIIIII IIIIIIIIIII IIIIIIIIIII IIIIIIIIIII IIIIIIIIIII IIIIIIIIIII 20 40 SLG 82/SIM 82/ SLA 81 Isolated mounting of ANT F5 on metal 20 MOBY F Metal-free space with flush mounting View of top Note: Non-adherence to metal-free space will reduce limit and working distance! Figure 3-11 View of side SLA 81 mounted in metal MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 3-17 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines SLA 82 The SLA 82 can be mounted flush in metal. Remember that the field data may be reduced (see chap. 3.4.2). Metal-free space with flush mounting: a = 50 mm Metal a a a a h = 30 mm (non-metallic base) Figure 3-12 3-18 Flush mounting in metal: SLA 82 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.4.2 Effects on the Transmission Window The following general points must be adhered to when installing MOBY F components. S The MDS and antennas may not be mounted directly on metal. S Flush installation of the components in metal reduces the field data. S Inside the transmission window, do not allow metal rails or similar to cut across the transmission field. The metal rail would affect the field data. S A test is recommended when critical applications are involved. S To ensure optimal field data even in metallic environments, the ANT F5 is calibrated at the plant to a distance of 100 mm to metal. See table 3-8. This chapter uses tables and graphs to illustrate the effects of metal on the field data (i.e., Sg, Sa, L and W). The values in the tables describe field data reduction in percentages (i.e., no effect: 100%). MDS and SLG 80/SIM 80 with ANT F5 Table 3-8 Reduction of field data in %: MDS and SLG/SIM with ANT F5 (See figures 3-13/3-14.) ANT F5 without Metal ANT F5 on Metal 65-mm Distance ANT F5 on Metal 100-mm Distance ANT F5 Flush in Metal; Metal-Free 100-mm Distance Around and 100-mm Depth MDS without metal 75 80 100 100 MDS on metal, 30-mm interval - 60 75 70 MDS on metal, 50-mm interval 70 1 65 90 80 MDS without metal 85 80 100 90 MDS on metal, 30-mm interval 55 60 75 70 MDS on metal, 50-mm interval 70 65 80 75 MDS without metal - 65 100 100 MDS on metal 20-mm interval - 65 75 75 SLG/SIM 80 MDS MDS F124 MDS F125 MDS F160 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 3-19 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Table 3-8 Reduction of field data in %: MDS and SLG/SIM with ANT F5 (See figures 3-13/3-14.) ANT F5 without Metal ANT F5 on Metal 65-mm Distance ANT F5 on Metal 100-mm Distance ANT F5 Flush in Metal; Metal-Free 100-mm Distance Around and 100-mm Depth MDS without metal 90 80 100 90 MDS on metal, 30-mm interval - 60 75 70 MDS on metal, 50-mm interval 70 65 80 75 SLG/SIM 80 MDS MDS F415 1 MDS and SLG 82/SIM 82/ SLA 81 In this configuration, the MDS F124 must be installed with a distance of w 150 mm to metal. Underranging this value may cause transmission gaps in the field. Table 3-9 Reduction of the field data by mounting in metal (in %): MDS and SLG 82/SIM 82/SLA 81 No Metal Mounted Flush in Metal; Metal-Free 20-mm Distance Around and 40-mm Depth MDS without metal 100 65 MDS on metal. Space of 20 mm 90 60 MDS mounted flush in metal. Space of 20 mm. 20 mm around outside. 75 55 MDS without metal 100 55 MDS on metal. Space of 20 mm 85 50 MDS mounted flush in metal. Space of 20 mm. 20 mm around outside. 70 45 MDS without metal 100 65 MDS on metal, space of 20 mm 85 60 MDS without metal 100 60 MDS on metal. Space of 20 mm 85 55 MDS mounted flush in metal. Space of 20 mm. 20 mm around outside. 70 50 SLG/SIM 82 and SLA 81 MDS MDS F124 MDS F125 MDS F160 MDS F415 3-20 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines MDS with SLA 82 Table 3-10 Reduction of the field data by mounting in metal (in %): MDS with SLA 82 Without Metal SLA 82 on Metal, Distance: 30 mm Mounted Flush in Metal; Metal-Free 50-mm Distance Around and 30-mm Depth MDS without metal 100 75 70 MDS on metal, distance of 20 mm 70 55 50 MDS mounted flush in metal, distance of 20 mm, distance around of 30 mm 55 45 40 MDS without metal 100 80 70 MDS on metal, distance of 20 mm 75 60 50 MDS mounted flush in metal, distance of 20 mm, distance around of 30 mm 60 50 40 MDS without metal 100 70 70 MDS on metal, distance of 20 mm 60 55 50 MDS without metal 100 75 70 MDS on metal, distance of 20 mm 80 55 50 MDS mounted flush in metal, distance of 20 mm, distance around of 30 mm 60 40 40 SLA 82 MDS MDS F124 MDS F125 MDS F160 MDS F415 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 3-21 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines The following figures illustrate the effects on the transmission window using the SLG 80 ANT F5 with the MDS F415 as an example. The percentages indicate the reduction of field data as related to the ANT F5 and the MDS in a metallic environment. 100% means no effect on the field data. MDS in metal-free environment MDS F415 MDS F415 100% 80% 100 mm ANT F5 65 mm ANT F5 Metal Metal Non-metallic spacer-holder MDS F415 MDS F415 90% 100 mm 100 mm 90% ANT F5 Non-metal Metal 100 mm Non-metallic spacer-holder Figure 3-13 3-22 MDS in metal-free environment MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines MDS in metallic environment Metal 50 mm Metal Non-metal MDS F415 50 mm Non-metal MDS F415 65% 80% 65 mm ANT F5 100 mm ANT F5 Metal Metal Non-metallic spacer-holder Metal 50 mm Metal Non-metal MDS F415 50 mm Non-metal MDS F415 70% 75% 100 mm ANT F5 100 mm Non-metal Metal 100 mm Non-metallic spacer-holder Figure 3-14 MDS in metallic environment MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 3-23 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.4.3 Reduction of Metallic Effects Interfering metal supports Metal support Non-metallic spacer OOOOOIII OOOOO III OOOOO Sheet metal MDS Bad Sa ANT F5 IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO III III A metal support is located over the transmission window of the ANT F5. This affects the entire field. The transmission window between ANT F5 and MDS is especially reduced. Metal Good MDS The location of the ANT F5 has been changed so that the transmission window is no longer affected. Sa ANT F5 IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII Figure 3-15 3-24 Interfering metal support MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Flush installation Non-metallic spacer Sheet metal OOOOOOO II OOOOOO OOO OOOOO OOO OOOOO IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII OOO OOOOO IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII Metal ANT F5 OOOOOOO OOOOOOO II II OOOOOO OOOOOO OOO OOOOO IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII OOO OOOOO IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII x > 600 mm w 50 mm ANT F5 w 50 mm OOOOO II OOOO OOOOO OOOO OOO OOO OOO OOO IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII a b Figure 3-16 a ANT F5 b Although flush mounting of the MDS and ANT F5 is always possible, the size of the transmission window is reduced considerably. The following measures can be used to counteract the reduction of this window. Metal Enlargement of the non-metallic spacer below the MDS and/or ANT F5. MDS and/or SLG are at least 50 mm higher than their metallic environment. At a distance of x > 600 mm from metal, the field is no longer noticeably affected. Enlargement of the non-metallic distances a and b. Rules of thumb: S Select a, b with a factor of 2 to 3 greater. S Enlargement of a, b has a greater effect for SLG/MDS with large limit distance than for SLG/MDS with small limit distance. Flush installation MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 3-25 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Installation of several ANT F5s on metal frame or support What must be done? Every ANT F5 which is mounted on metal with insulation couples part of the field on the metal support. If minimum distance D and metal-free spaces a, b are adhered to, there are usually no counter effects. However, effects are possible if the location of an iron frame is particularly unfavorable. This increases data transmission times and creates sporadic error messages on the interface. a) Enlargement of distance D between the two antennas Non-metallic spacer ANT F5 A ANT F5 B D b) Insertion of a non-metallic spacer (thickness of 100 millimeters) between ANT F5 and iron frame. This significantly reduces the parasitic interference of the field on the support. Non-metallic spacer ANT F5 A 3-26 ANT F5 B MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.4.4 Chemical Resistance of the Mobile Data Memories The MDSs F124/F125/F415 are resistant to the substances listed in the following table. Table 3-11 Chemical resistance of data memories made of fiber glass reinforced epoxy resin (MDS F124/F125/F415) Formic acid Ammonia, gaseous Ammonia, liquid, anhydrous Ammonium hydroxide Ethanol Ethylene glycol Gasoline, free of aromatic compounds Gasoline, unstripped Bezoates (Na-, Ca- and similar) Bezoic acid Benzine Borax Boric acid Bromine, liquid Butadiene (1, 3-) Butane, gaseous Butanol Butyric acid Carbonates (ammonia-, Na- and sim.) Chlorine, liquid Chlorine, gaseous, dry Chlorobenzene Chloride (ammonia-, Na- and similar) Chloroform Chlorophyll Chlorine water (saturated solution) Chromates (K-, Na- and similar) Chromic acid Chromic sulfuric acid Citrates (ammonia-, Na- and similar) "Lemon acid" Cyanamide Cyanides (K-, Na- and similar) Cyclohexanol Cyclohexanone Diethylene glycol Bichromates (K- and Na-) Dioxan Developer Acetic acid Fixing bath Fluorides (ammonia-, K-, Na- and sim.) Hydrofluoric acid Formaldehyde Gluconic acid MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Concentration 20_ C 50% 100% J F J j J 10% 40_ C 60_ C J J J J J J J J J 100% J j J J j F J 100% j j J J j J F Up to 50% Up to 30% J j j J J J J J F J J j J 100% F J J Up to 40% 50% J J J 3-27 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Table 3-11 Chemical resistance of data memories made of fiber glass reinforced epoxy resin (MDS F124/F125/F415) Concentration Glycerin Glycocoll Urine Uric acid Hexafluoro silicate (ammonia-. Na- and similar) Hydroxides (alkaline earth metal-) Iodides (K-, Na- and similar) Silicic acid Methanol Methylene chloride Lactic acid Mineral oils Nitrates (ammonia-, K- and similar) Nitroglycerin Oxalic acid Perchlorates (K-) Phenol Phosphates (ammonia-, Na- and similar) Phosphoric acid Propyl alcohol Nitric acid Hydrochloric acid Brine Sulfur dioxide Carbon bisulphide, 100% Sulphuric acid Sulphurous acid Soap solution Sulfates (ammonia-, Na- and similar) Sulfites (ammonia-, Na- and similar) Tar, free of aromatic compounds Turpentine Trichlorethlylene Tartaric acid 20_ C 40_ C 60_ C J J J J J J J J J 100% 100% j F J J j J J 1% 50% 85% 25% 10% J J J J J j j j 100% 40% F j j F J J j J J j J Explanation of the symbols J Resistant F Somewhat resistant j Not resistant 3-28 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.5 EMC Guidelines 3.5.1 Foreword The EMC guidelines contain the following information. S Why are the EMC guidelines necessary? S What interference affects the controller from the outside? S How can interference be prevented? S How can interference be corrected? S Which standards apply to the EMC guidelines? S Examples of an interference-suppressed system setup The description is directed to "qualified personnel". S Configuration engineers and planners who plan system configuration with the MOBY modules and who must adhere to the required guidelines S Skilled personnel and service engineers who install the connection cables based on this description or who can correct deficiencies in this area when a malfunction occurs. ! Warning Non-adherence to especially highlighted notes can cause dangerous states in the system or destroy either single components or the entire system. MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 3-29 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.5.2 General The continuously growing use of electrical and electronic devices brings with it the following characteristics. S Greater concentration of components S Increasing capacity of power electronics S Rising switching speeds S Lower current consumption of the components The higher the degree of automation, the greater the danger that devices will interfere with one another. S Electromagnetic compatibility (i.e., EMC) is the ability of a piece of electrical or electronic equipment to function correctly in an electromagnetic environment without interfering with or adversely affecting its surroundings within certain limits. EMC can be divided into three areas. S Intrinsic interference immunity Resistance to internal (i.e., own) electrical interference S Free interference immunity Resistance to external electromagnetic interference S Degree of interference emission Interference emission and effects of the electrical environment All three areas are included in the test of an electrical device. The MOBY modules are tested for adherence to the limit values contained in the CE and BAPT guidelines. Since MOBY modules are only one of many components in a total system and the combination of various components may also create sources of interference, certain guidelines must be adhered to when setting up a system. EMC measures usually consist of an entire package of measures all of which must be taken in order to obtain an interference-immune system. Note S The system provider is responsible for adherence to the EMC guidelines, while the user is responsible for the interference suppression of the complete system. S All measures taken while the system is being set up will eliminate the need for expensive modifications and removal of interference sources later. S Although the regulations of specific countries must also be adhered to, this information is not covered in the documentation. 3-30 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.5.3 Spreading of Interference Three components are required so that interference can affect a system. S Source of interference S Coupling path S Potentially susceptible equipment Interference source Ex: a drive Figure 3-17 Coupling path Ex: MOBY cable Potentially susceptible device Ex: ASM 470 Spreading of interference If one of these components is missing (e.g., the coupling path between the source of the interference and the potentially susceptible device), the susceptible device will not be affected even when strong interference is being emitted. The EMC measures affect all three components to prevent any malfunctions caused by interference. When a system is set up, the provider must take all possible measure to prevent the creation of sources of interference. S Only equipment which meets limit value class A of VDE 0871 may be used in a system. S All interference caused by devices must be suppressed. This includes all coils and windings. S The layout of the cabinet must be such that reciprocal interference of the individual components is avoided or kept as low as possible. S Measures must be taken to eliminate interference from external sources. The next few chapters provide information and tips on how to set up a system. MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 3-31 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Sources of interference It is necessary to be familiar with the most frequent sources of interference in order to achieve a high degree of electromagnetic compatibility (i.e., a very low degree of interference in the environment) in a system. These sources of interference must be eliminated by taking appropriate measures. Table 3-12 Interference sources: Origin and effects Interference Source Effect on Potentially Susceptible Equipment Contactor, electronic valves Contacts Power network malfunctions Coils Magnetic field Electric motor Collector Electrical field Winding Magnetic field Contacts Electrical field Transformer Magnetic field, power network malfunction, equalizing currents Power pack, switchedmode Circuit Electrical and magnetic field, power network malfunction High-frequency devices Circuit Electromagnetic field Sender (e.g., industrial radios) Antenna Electromagnetic field Difference in grounding or reference potential Voltage difference Equalizing currents Operator Static charging Electrical discharging currents, electrical field High-voltage current cable Current flow Electrical and magnetic field, power network malfunction High-voltage cable Voltage difference Electrical field Monitors Circuit Electromagnetic field Defective neon lamps Starter Power network malfunction Energy-saver lamps Circuit Electromagnetic field Computer, PC Circuit Electromagnetic field Electric welding device 3-32 Interference Origin MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Coupling paths A coupling path is required before interference generated by the source can take effect. There are four kinds of interference coupling. I N T E R F E R E N C E Galvanic coupling path MOBY ASM o. SLG Capacitive coupling path MOBY ASM o. SLG Capacitive coupling path S O U R C E MOBY ASM o. SLG Emission coupling Figure 3-18 MOBY ASM o. SLG P O T E N T I A L L Y S U S C E P T I B L E D E V I C E The four kinds of interference coupling When MOBY modules are used, various components of the total system can act as coupling paths. Table 3-13 Causes of coupling paths Cause Coupling Path Cables and lines Incorrect or unfavorable installation Missing or incorrectly connected shields Cables spaced unfavorably Switching cabinet or SIMATIC housing h i Missing or incorrectly wired equalizing line Missing or incorrect grounding Cables spaced unfavorably Modules not installed securely Poor cabinet layout MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 3-33 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.5.4 The FFT Command Features for the user The FFT command filters EMC interference from the environment. This means that you can still use the MOBY F in environments where other identification systems fail. Typical example: Computer monitors or switching power packs cause such interference in the environment that a MOBY F SLG may no longer be able to function fully when in the vicinity of these devices. The maximum read-access distance may be reduced to 0. Use of the FFT command restores the maximum read-access distance again. Use The FFT command (Fast Fourier Transformation) is a command to the processor of the read/write device (SLG). The FFT command causes the processor of the SLG to screen out interference signals in the area around the SLG. The FFT command should be used under the following conditions. S When the interference environment around the SLG changes S After the SLG is turned on S When processing of the MDS commands takes longer than stated in the documentation S In critical applications, the FFT command can be started prior to every MDS command. S The SLG automatically performs an FFT once after being turned on. The FFT command may not be used under the following conditions. S When a fixed code MDS (MDS 1xx) is located near an SLG Processing time The FFT command requires a processing time of approx. 110 msec. Execution of the command The FFT command is started by the user with a special command. Execution of the command varies depending on the interface. The next few pages describe how the FFT command is handled on the different interfaces. FFT command for FB 250/ASM 400 The FFT command is started with the special command with the subcode 0005. Command FFT command 3-34 Code 04 Length 01 Subcode 0005 Data (DATDB) 1st data byte 01 = FFT command MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines FFT command with ASM 410 FFT command with FC 44, FB 240/ASM 450 Bit 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 00 00 00 00 xx 00 00 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 01 = Read 00 = Acknowledge 01 = Execute FFT 1 = Special command (observe byte 6 of PIO) Status command: The status command executes an FFT command on the ASM in addition to the status scan. The MOBY F must have been parameterized beforehand. The command is available with both the FB/FC and the user interface. FFT command with FC 45/ ASM 452 The FFT command is performed with the "antenna on/off" command and sub_command = 09. FFT command with FC 47, FB 47/ASM 470 System command: The INIT command is usually redefined into a system command. This ensures compatibility at lower levels. Parameterizing the MOBY modes Before the FFT command can be used, one of the MOBY F modes must have already been set. The following table shows the parameterization for the different MOBY interfaces. Table 3-14 Operating Mode Parameterization of the MOBY F operating modes for the FFT command ASM 400 ASM 410 FB 250 ASM 450 ASM 470 FC 44/ FB 240 User interface (opt. 1) FC 47/ FB 47 User interface (byte 3) MOBY F MDS F1xx3 91 1 91 2 (byte 5 in PIO) 5 A 5 A MOBY F MDS F4xx 92 1 92 2 6 B 6 B MOBY F MDS F2xx 93 1 93 2 7 C 7 C 1 2 3 The subcode for this parameterization is 0004. The presence check must be turned off before the MOBY F is turned on. The presence (ANW) check can be turned on at the same time as the MOBY F. The FFT command is not permitted with the MDS F1xx (is rejected with error 0F). Note The FFT command is only available with SLG 80 ANT F5 and SIM 80 ANT F5. MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 3-35 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.5.5 Cabinet Layout User influence on the configuration of an interference-immune system includes the cabinet layout, cable installation, grounding connections and correct shielding of lines. Note For notes on correct cabinet layout in accordance with EMC guidelines, see the layout guidelines of the SIMATIC controller. Shielding via housing Metal housings for potentially susceptible equipment can be used to keep out magnetic and electrical fields and electromagnetic waves. The better the induced interference current can flow, the greater the spontaneous weakening of the field of interference. All sheet metal on the housings or sheet metal in the cabinet must be well connected together (i.e., with a high degree of conductivity). Figure 3-19 Shielding via housing When the sheet metal parts of switching cabinets are insulated against each other, a high-frequency conductive connection with the ribbon cables and high-frequency terminals or HF conductive paste can be created. The greater the connection surface, the better the high-frequency conductive capacity. This cannot be achieved by connection with simple wires. 3-36 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Avoiding interference via optimal layout Good interference diversion is achieved by installing SIMATIC controllers on conductive mounting plates (unpainted). When setting up the switching cabinet, interference can be easily avoided by adhering to guidelines. Power components (e.g., transformers, drives and load power supplies) should be installed separately (i.e., separated by space) from the controller components (e.g., relay controllers and SIMATIC S5). The following basic principles apply. 1. The effect of interference decreases the greater the distance between interference source and potentially susceptible equipment. 2. Interference is further reduced by installing shielding plates. 3. Load lines and high-voltage current cables must be installed separately from the signal lines at a distance of at least 10 cm. PS CPU/EU Shielding plate Drive Figure 3-20 Avoidance of interference via optimal layout MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 3-37 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Filtering the supply voltage External interference from the power network can be avoided by installing power network filters. In addition to correct dimensioning, proper installation is very important. It is imperative that the power network filter be installed directly at the entrance to the cabinet. Interference currents are filtered out early at the entrance and not conducted through the cabinet. Right Wrong Power filter Is Power filter Is IS = Interference current Figure 3-21 3-38 Filtering the supply voltage MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.5.6 Avoiding Interference Sources Sources of interference in a system must be avoided so that a higher degree of interference immunity can be achieved. All circuited inductivities are a frequent cause of interference in a system. Interference suppression of inductivities Since relays, contactors and so on generate interference voltages, this interference must be suppressed with one of the following circuits. When the coil is switched, up to 800 V can be created on 24 V coils even with small relays. Several kV can be created on 220 V coils. By using freewheeling diodes or RC circuitry, the interference voltage is prevented and, with it, the inductive interference in the lines parallel to the coil lines. Relay coils Valves Contactors Brakes Figure 3-22 Inductive interference Note All coils in the cabinet must be interference-suppressed. Valves and motor brakes are frequently forgotten. Fluorescent lamps in the switching cabinet must be subjected to a special test. MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 3-39 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.5.7 Equipotential Bonding Differing system part layouts and differing voltage levels can cause differences in potential between the parts of a system. When the system parts are connected via signal lines, equalizing currents flow through these signal lines. These equalizing currents can distort the signals. This makes correct equipotential bonding imperative. S The cross section of the equipotential bonding line must be large enough (i.e., at least 10 mm2). S The space between signal cable and related equipotential bonding line must be kept as small as possible (i.e., antenna effect). S A fine-wire line must be used (i.e., better conduction of high frequencies). S When connecting equipotential bonding lines to the central equipotential bonding rail, power components and non-power components must be combined. Cabinet 1 Cabinet 2 Power pack EU wrong EU EU PLC wrong Drive Figure 3-23 Equipotential bonding The better the equipotential bonding in a system, the smaller the chance of interference caused by fluctuations in potential. Equipotential bonding should not be confused with the protective grounding of a system. Protective grounding prevents the creation of excessive touch voltages when devices malfunction. 3-40 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.5.8 Ground Fault Monitoring with MOBY L+ 230 V 24 V R R ASM R R Interface to the computer or PC Ground fault monitoring device When a voltage asymmetry against protective ground occurs on lines L+ or L-, the current circuit is interrupted. Figure 3-24 SLG L- Ungrounded power pack To connect a grounded computer or PC, the connection must contain a galvanic coupling (e.g., optocoupler). Circuit diagram of the principle of grounding fault monitoring SIMATIC with ASM 400 The SIMATIC is a grounded system. In the power pack of the SIMATIC, 0 V (i.e., signal ground) is connected to the housing. On the ASM 400, the 0 V signal of the external 24 V power pack is connected with 0 V of the SIMATIC. The connection between the ASM 400 (SIMATIC) and the SLG is equipotentially bonded (i.e., RS 422 interface without galvanic isolation). A direct setup with grounding fault monitoring is not possible. Proceed as described in the SIMATIC manual if grounding fault monitoring is necessary. SIMATIC AG 100U with ASM 410 ASM 410 C P U PLC 100U SLG Galvanic isolation 230V 24V Figure 3-25 Grounding fault monitoring SIMATIC PLC 100U with ASM 410 The ASM 410 is equipped with galvanic isolation to the SIMATIC CPU. A layout with grounding fault monitoring is simple. MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 3-41 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.5.9 Shielding the Cables To suppress interference in the signal cables, these cables must be shielded. The best shielding effect is achieved by installation in steel piping. However, this is only necessary when the signal lines must pass through an interference-prone environment. In most cases, the use of braided shields is sufficient. In either situation, correct connection is decisive for the shielding action. Note A shield which is not connected at all or is connected incorrectly has no shielding effect. The following principles apply. S For analog signal lines, the shield connection must be one-sided and on the receiver side. S For digital signal lines, the shield connection must be two-sided on the housing. S Since interference signals are frequently in the HF range (i.e., > 10 kHz), connection of the HF-capacity shield must be provided over a large surface. Figure 3-26 Shielding of the cables The shield rail must be connected to the housing of the switching cabinet over a large surface (i.e., good conductivity) and must be located as close to the cable lead-in as possible. The cables must be bared and clamped (highfrequency clamp) to the shield rail or be bound with cable binders. The location must have good conductivity. 3-42 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Cable binder Remove paint Figure 3-27 Connection of the shield rail The shield bar must be connected with the protective ground (PE) bar. When shielded cables must be interrupted, the shield must also be applied to the plug connector housing. Only suitable plug connectors may be used. Shield turned up backwards by 180 and connected with the plug connector housing OOOOO OOOO OOOO Figure 3-28 Rubber sleeve Interruption of shielded cables When adapter plugs which do not have suitable shield termination are used, the shield must be continued through cable clamps to the point of interruption. This ensures a large-surface, HF conductive connection. MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 3-43 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.5.10 Basic Rules on EMC Electromagnetic compatibility (i.e., EMC) can often be ensured by following a few elementary rules. Rules which apply to the layout of the cabinet are listed below. Shielding via housing S Protect the programmable controller from external interference by installing it in a cabinet or housing. The cabinet or the housing must be included in the grounding connection. S Shield electromagnetic fields of inductivity from the programmable controller with separator plates. S Use metallic plug housings for shielded data transmission lines. Large-surface grounding connection S Connect all inactive metal parts with low HF resistance over a large surface. S Provide a large-surface connection between the inactive metal parts and the central grounding point. S Remember to connect the shield bar to ground (i.e., a large-area connection of the shield bar to ground must be provided). S Aluminum parts should not be used for grounding connections. Planning the cabling S Organize the cables into groups, and install these groups separately. S Always install high-voltage current lines and signal lines in separate ducts or bundles. S Introduce all cabling into the cabinet from only one side and, if possible, at one level. S Install the signal lines as close to the grounding surfaces as possible. S Twist the feeder and return conductors of individually installed conductors. 3-44 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Shielding the lines S Shield the data transmission lines, and apply the shield on both sides. S Shield the analog lines, and apply the shield on one side (e.g., on the drive). S Always apply the line shields at the cabinet entrance to the shield bar over a large surface, and secure these with clamps. S Continue the applied shield without interruption to the module. S Use braided shields and not foil shields. Power supply and signal filter S Only use power supply filters with metal housings. S Connect the filter housing (i.e., connection must be low HF resistant and over a large surface) to cabinet ground. S Never secure the filter housing to painted surfaces. S Secure the filter at the cabinet entrance or in the direction of the interference source. MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 3-45 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.6 Concept of MOBY Shielding With MOBY the data are transferred between ASM and SLG over an RS 422 interface at a speed of 19200 baud. The distance between ASM and SLG may be up to 1000 m. MOBY cable installation should be treated the same as that of a data processing system. Special attention should be paid to shielding of all data cables. The following figure shows the primary points required for a secure layout. I I Grounding bar for all shielded cables. It must be located as close as possible to the cable lead-in in the cabinet. The bar must be grounded to the cabinet over a large surface and use short connections. 90 to 230V AC 24V DC Additional SLGs Each cabinet is centrally grounded. The cable shield is applied to the SLG plug connector on the appropriate shield pin. The cable shield of the SLG may not be applied to a grounded point (i.e., no grounding clamp). The cable jacket of the SLG cables must be bared directly at the cable lead-in. A shield clamp is used for the connection of the cable shield to the grounding bar. This will divert interference voltages of + 2.5 kV on the SLG cable. Careful shield connection is particularly important for long cables or interference-prone industrial environments. Figure 3-29 3-46 1 grounding screw1 The SLG must be grounded on the grounding screw provided. Simple layout with ASM 400 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Connection of other modules (e.g., ASM 410) To divert interference which can occur on the connection cable to the SLG, use the same measures as described for the ASM 400. Layout of an S7-300 with MOBY When connecting the SLG to the ASM 470, it is essential that a shield connection terminal be used for the cable shield. Shield connection terminals and holders are standard components of the S7-300 product family. Holder Shield connection terminal Cable to SLG 1 Figure 3-30 Cabling for ASM 470 Cable to SLG 2 Layout of the ASM 470 with shield connecting element To ensure EMC, an S7-300 shield connecting element must be used for the SLG cable. See figure 3-30. The shield of the SLG cable must be bared as shown in figure 3-31. 30 170 Specifications in mm Figure 3-31 Baring of the cable shield MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 3-47 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.7 Cable and Plug Connector Allocation The cable jacket used for the standard MOBY SLG/SIM data cable is made of polyurethane (PUR in accordance with VDE 0250). This provides excellent resistance to oils, acids, lye and hydraulic liquids. 3.7.1 Cable Configuration The cable between the ASM and the SLG requires five cores + shield. The data can be transmitted over distances up to 1000 m almost regardless of the wire diameter. Standard cable LiYC11Y recommended by Siemens (see table 3-25 for standard plug-in lines). Grounding the SLG 80 ANT F5 data cable We recommend always leading (large area) the shield of the SLG 80 ANT F5 cable to a grounding rail. Cable with drag capability The SLG/SIM can also be connected with a cable with drag capability. Recommended cable type: HPM Paartronic 3340-C-PUR 3 2 0.25. The cable can be made by the customer. Voltage supply for the SLG/SIM/ ASM 824/850/854 The voltage supply of the SLG / SIM / ASM 824/850/854 is provided by a 4-pole plug connector. It is essential to consider the voltage drop on the supply cable. The permissible length of the voltage supply cable depends on the current consumption of the SLG / SIM / ASM 824/850/854 and on the ohmic resistance of the connection cable. Table 3-15 Voltage supply of the SLG/SIM 80 ANT F5 and SLG/SIM 82 SLG/SIM 80 ANT F5 Nominal value 24 V DC 24 V DC Permissible range 20 to 30 V (meas. on plug of SLG/SIM) 20 to 30 V (meas. on plug of SLG/SIM) 1.5 A 0.6 A (without DO) 1.1 A (with DO, only SIM) 1.1 A 0.25 A - Current consumption Startup current At 24 V 3-48 SLG/SIM 82 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Table 3-16 Maximum ripple of the supply voltage for SLG/SIM 80 (based on frequency range) fripple (kHz) Uripple max. (mV RMS) fripple t 0.5 48 0.5 v fripple t 20 7 20 v fripple t 120 36 120 v fripple t 130 12 fripple u 130 48 Note For SLG/SIM 80 ANT F5 When a switching power pack is used, make sure that the switching frequency is in the range of 160 kHz < fswitch < 200 kHz. 3.7.2 Plug Connector Allocations SLG/SIM 80 ANT F5 SLG 82 Plug connector on SLG/SIM Table 3-17 Plug connector allocation of the SLG/SIM 80 ANT F5/SLG 82 plug connector (pin housing side) Designation Pin SIM 80 ANT F5 (RS 232) 1 Cable shield Cable shield 2 + Receive TxD Send 3 + Send RxD Receive 4 Not used Digital input 5 - Send Ground (0 V) 6 - Receive Not used 7 Ground (0 V) Not used 8 Cable shield Cable shield 9 Not used Digital output Housing Not used Not used 9-pole submin D plug connector with screwtype lock ! SLG 80 ANT F5 SLG 82 (RS 422) Caution If metallized sub D housings are used on the SLG/SIM side, the housing must be connected with the cable shield. MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 3-49 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines ASM 400 Plug connector on ASM 400 Plug connector allocation of the 9-pole submin D1 (socket housing side) Table 3-18 Socket 9-pole submin D plug connector with screwtype lock 1 Not used 2 + Send 3 + Receive 4 Not used 5 - Receive 6 - Send 7 Ground (0 V) 8 Not used 9 Not used Housing 1 Designation Cable shield This plug connector allocation is valid for ASM 400 => SLG ASM 824/850/854 Plug connector allocation of the 9-pole submin D1 (socket housing side) Table 3-19 Plug connector on SLG/SIM 82. ASM 824/850/854 (to SLA 81/SLA 82) Socket 9-pole submin D plug connector with screwtype lock 1 +6.6 Volt 2 + Send 3 + Receive 4 CLK + 5 - Receive 6 - Send 7 Ground (0 V) 8 +24 Volt 9 CLK - Housing 1 3-50 Designation Cable shield This plug connector allocation is valid for SLG 82, SIM 82, ASM 824, ASM 850, ASM 854 <=> SLA 81/SLA 82 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines SLA 81/SLA 82 Plug connector allocation of SLA plug connector1 (pin housing side) Table 3-20 Plug connector on SLA 81 Pin 4 5 3 8 6 7 2 1 View of top 1 1 +6.6 Volt 2 + Send 3 + Receive 4 CLK + 5 - Receive 6 - Send 7 CLK - 8 Ground (0 V) This plug connector allocation is valid for SLA 81/SLA 82 <=> SLG 82, SIM 82, ASM 824, ASM 850, ASM 854 Plug connector allocation of the 9-pole submin D1 (socket housing side) Table 3-21 Plug "SERIAL" on SIM 82. ASM 824/850/854 Designation Socket Designation RS 232 9-pole submin D plug connector with screwtype lock 1 Not used Not used 2 TxD (send) D- (send) 3 RxD (receive) E- (receive) 4 Not used Not used 5 Ground (0 V) Ground (0 V) 6 Not used Not used 7 Not used Not used 8 Not used D+ (send) 9 Not used E+ (receive) Cable shield Cable shield Housing 1 RS 422 This plug connector allocation is valid for SIM 82, ASM 824, ASM 850, ASM 854 (plug "SERIAL"). Ordering data Table 3-22 Ordering data for counterplug IP65 Counterplug IP65 for SLG and SIM (9-pin, submin, D plug connector, socket) MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 6GT2 490-1AA00 3-51 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Voltage supply plug connector on SLG/SIM on SLG 80/82. SIM 80/82. ASM 824/850/854 Table 3-23 Plug connector allocation of 4-pole voltage supply plug connector (pin housing side) Pin Designation 1 Ground (0 V) 4 3 2 + 24 V 1 2 3 + 24 V 4 Ground (0 V) View of top Ordering data Table 3-24 Ordering data for voltage supply plug Plug for voltage supply (socket) for SLG/SIM 82, ASM 824/850/854 3-52 6GT2 390-1AB00 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.7.3 Connection Cables Connection cable for ASM 400 SLG 6GT2 491-0A... SLG side1 ASM side 2 2 6 6 3 3 9-pole submin D 5 (socket, screw7 type-lock) 9-pole submin D 5 (pins, screw7 type-lock) Housing 1 Connection cable: ASM 400 SLG ASM side 3 (7) White 4 (8) Brown 6 (10) 2 6 Green 3 Yellow 5 Gray 2 (Shield) 7 (Shield) 9-pole submin D (socket, screwtype-lock) 1 8 Caution If metallized sub D housings are used on the SLG/SIM side, the housing must be connected with the cable shield. Figure 3-33 ! SLG side1 Cable with core end sleeves 5 (9) 1 8 Caution If metallized sub D housings are used on the SLG/SIM side, the housing must be connected with the cable shield. Figure 3-32 Connection cable for ASM 410 SLG 6GT2 491-0D... 1 (Shield) Connection cable: ASM 410 SLG Caution The cable shield must be secured with a shield clamp directly on the interface module and grounded via a grounding rail. MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 3-53 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Connection cable for ASM 450/452/473 SLG 6GT2 491-1C... SLG side1 ASM side X1/2 25 X1/3 X1/1 18.5 X1/4 X1 X2 Two 5-pole M12 round plug connectors X2/3 X1/5 White 2 Brown 6 Green 3 Yellow 5 Gray 7 1 (Shield) 8 X2/5 1 Caution If metallized sub D housings are used on the SLG/SIM side, the housing must be connected with the cable shield. Figure 3-34 Connection cable for ASM 470/475 SLG 6GT2 491-0E... Connection cable: ASM 450/452/473 SLG Cable with core end sleeves ASM side 4 (12) 5 (13) 6 (14) 7 (15) 9 (17) SLG side1 White 2 Brown 6 Green 3 Yellow Gray (Shield) 1 9-pole submin D (socket, screwtype-lock) 5 7 9-pole submin D (socket, screwtype-lock) 1 8 Cable shield bared Caution If metallized sub D housings are used on the SLG/SIM side, the housing must be connected with the cable shield. Figure 3-35 Connection cable: ASM 470/475 SLG Note The SLG voltage supply cannot be connected via the ASM. 3-54 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Connection cable RS 232; PC SIM 80 ANT F5 6GT2 491-1DH50 SIM side1 PC (RS 232) side 2 3 5 RxD TxD TxD RxD 0V 0V Test cable for DI/DO 2 3 5 9-pole submin D (socket, screwtype-lock) 9-pole submin D (socket, screwtype-lock) 1 (Shield) Housing 0.53 m Adapter 8 Total length: 5 m Pin Allocation of Terminal Module Terminal 1 Caution If metallized sub D housings are used on the SLG/SIM side, the housing must be connected with the cable shield. Figure 3-36 Designation 1 Cable shield 2 TxD Send 3 RxD Receive 4 Digital input 5 Ground (0 V) 6 Not used 7 Not used 8 Cable shield 9 Digital output 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Connection cable: PC SIM 80 ANT F5 (not for SIM 82) Connecting cable RS 232; PC SLG 6GT2 691-0BH50 6GT2 691-0BN20 PC side 9-pole submin D (socket, screwtype-lock) SLG side 9-pole submin D (socket, screwtype-lock) 2 3 5 Housing RxD TxD 2 TxD RxD 3 0V 0V (Shield) 5 1 8 5 m/20 m Figure 3-37 Connecting cable RS 232 PC SLG MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 3-55 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Connection cable RS 232 PC SIM 82/ ASM 824 6GT2 391-0BH50 SIM/ASM side PC side 9-pole submin D 1 (pins, screw-type2 lock) 3 RxD TxD TxD RxD 0V 0V 1 9-pole submin D (socket, screw2 type-lock) 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 Housing Housing 5 m* * When made by customer, up to max. of 32 m Figure 3-38 Connection cable SLG/SIM 82; ASM 824/850/854 SLA 81/SLA 82 6GT2 391-1AH50 Connection cable, RS 232 PC SIM 82/ASM 824 ASM side SLA side 9-pole submin D 1 (pins, screw-type2 lock) 1 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 Pin 8 free 8 8 2 SLA plug, M12, socket 9 5m Figure 3-39 3-56 Connection cable, SLG/SIM 82; ASM 824/850/854 SLA 81/SLA 82 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Extension cable, SLG/SIM 82; ASM 824/850/854 SLA 81/SLA 82 6GT2 391-1BN10 6GT2 391-1BN25 Coupling side 8-pole, M12 pins for connection cable SLA 81 6GT2 391-1AH50 SLA side 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 SLA plug M12 socket 10 m/25 m Figure 3-40 24 V DC stub line SLG 80/82; SIM 80/82; ASM 824/850/854 MOBY widerange power pack 6GT2 491-1HH50 Extension cable, SLG/SIM 82; ASM 824/850/854 SLA 81/SLA 82 Power pack side SLG/SIM/ASM side 4-pole, M12 pins 4-pole, M12 socket 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5m Figure 3-41 24 V DC stub line SLG/SIM/ASM MOBY wide-range power pack MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 3-57 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.7.4 Cable length The length key for MOBY cables is no longer supported as of 10.01.2001 and cables are now only offered in certain lengths (see table 3-25). Cable fabrication by the customer continues to be possible in all lengths. Table 3-25 Ordering data for MOBY cables SLG stub line, ready for use Between S ASM 400 and SLG 8x Length: 5m 20 m 6GT2 491-0AH50 6GT2 491-0AN20 Length: 5m 20 m 6GT2 491-0DH50 6GT2 491-0DN20 2m 5m 20 m 6GT2 491-1CH20 6GT2 491-1CH50 6GT2 491-1CN20 5m 20 m 50 m 6GT2 491-0EH50 6GT2 491-0EN20 6GT2 491-0EN50 S ASM 410 and SLG 8x S ASM 450/452/473 and SLG 8x Length: S ASM 470/475 and SLG 8x Length: Standard connection cable between SLA 81/SLA 82 ASM 824/850/854 (Length: 5 m, not included with the SLA) 6GT2 391-1AH50 Extension for antenna line SLA 81/SLA 82 6GT2 391-1AH50 Length: 10 m 25 m 6GT2 391-1BN10 6GT2 391-1BN25 Stub line, 24 V 24 V DC stub line for wide-range power pack 6GT2 494-0AA00 Length: 5m 6GT2 491-1HH50 Length: 5m 6GT2 391-0BH50 Length: 5m 20 m 6GT2 691-0BH50 6GT2 691-0BN20 5m 6GT2 491-1DH50 RS 232 stub line Between PC and ASM 824 or SIM 82 Between PC and SLG 8x Between PC and SIM 80 ANT F5 Length: 3-58 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Mobile Data Memories MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 4 4-1 Mobile Data Memories 4.1 Introduction Application area With MOBY, identification is automatic, fast and reliable. The data stored on a mobile data memory (i.e., MDS) accompany a product, work piece carrier, or a transport or packaging unit throughout the entire material flow process. The MDS is available in various models to permit specific selection for the desired application. When an MDS is affixed to the unit to be identified, data can be stored inductively (i.e., no contact required) on the MDS and updated inductively or read at every stage of the material flow process. The sturdy construction of the MDSs permits use under very rugged conditions and ensures resistance to many chemical substances. Layout and functions Mobile data memories (MDSs) are built from the following primary components. S Antenna - receipt of power and receipt/sending of data signals S Logic - A/D-D/A conversion, memory access and data backup S Memory - fixed code (read-only) or EEPROM memory (read-write), depending on the model S Housing - reliable protection against environmental conditions When an MDS moves into the transmission field of the read/write device (SLG), it is powered by this field. The logic monitors the power supply and handles conversion of the analog-modulated signals into digital information. Depending on the requested function, the logic performs test and memory operations and sends appropriately converted analog-modulated signals back to the SLG. MOBY F offers MDSs with fixed code (read-only) and EEPROM memories (read-write). Ubersicht Table 4-1 MDS Type Memory Size Temperature Range (During Operation) Dimensions (D x H) in mm Protection Rating MDS F124 40-bit fixed code -25 to +100 C 30 x 1 IP67 MDS F125 40-bit fixed code -25 to +100 C 50 x 1 IP67 MDS F160 40-bit fixed code -25 to +85 C 16 x 3 IP68 MDS F415 256-byte EEPROM 1 -25 to +100 C 50 x 1 IP67 1 4-2 Overview of the MDS 192-byte EEPROM can be used with SLG. 224-byte EEPROM can be used with SIM. MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Mobile Data Memories Operational requirements/ environmental requirements Table 4-2 Operational requirements/environmental requirements of MDS MDS F124/MDS F125/ MDS F160/MDS F415 Proof of mechanical stability is provided by oscillation test in accordance with: EN 60721-3-7, class 7M3 Test conditions: Frequency range 2 to 500 Hz Amplitude excursion 7.5 mm (2 to 9 Hz) Acceleration 2 g (9 to 200 Hz) 4 g (200 to 500 Hz) Test duration per axis 20 frequency cycles Proof of mechanical stability via continuous shock stress in accordance with: EN 60721-3-7, class 7M3 Test conditions: Acceleration 100 g Duration 6 msec Test duration per axis 500 impacts per axis Protection rating IP67/IP68 in acc. w. EN 60529 Ambient temperature During operation During transportation and storage -25 C to +85/+100 C -25/-40 C to +100/+130 C Temperature gradient in storage temperature range in acc. w. part 2-4 of DIN IEC 68 3 C/min Temperature gradient for fast temperature change in acc. w. part 2-14 of DIN IEC 68 Duration: 30 min per extreme Change from one extreme to other: Approx. 10 sec, 100 cycles Torsion and bending stress Not permitted MTBF 2.5 x 106 hours Definition of IP67 - Protection against penetration of dust (i.e., dust-proof) - Full protection against touch - Protection against water under specified pressure and time Definition of IP68 - Protection against penetration of dust (i.e., dust-proof) - Full protection against touch - The MDS can be immersed in water (24 hr, 2 m). MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 4-3 Mobile Data Memories 4.2 MDS F124 Ordering data Figure 4-1 MDS F124 Table 4-3 Ordering data for MDS F124 Order No. MDS F124 mobile data memory 40-bit fixed code Technical data 4-4 Table 4-4 6GT2 400-1CE00 Technical data of MDS F124 Memory size 40 bits (ID no.) Memory organization Fixed code Multi-tag capability No MTBF 2.5 x 106 hours Read cycles Unlimited Read distance See field data. Vibration 20 g Shock 100 g Torsion and bending stress Not permitted Direction dependency No Securing of MDS Adhesive, recessed head screw (M3) Turning moment at + 20 C v 1 Nm Protection rating in acc. w. EN 60529 IP67 Physical design Pressed, impact-proof epoxide material Color Black Material Epoxide resin Dimensions (D x H) in mm 30 x 1 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Mobile Data Memories Table 4-4 Technical data of MDS F124 Ambient temperature During operation During transportation and storage Weight (approx.) ! Field data -25 C to +100 C -40 C to +130 C 5g Caution When switching through the SLG/SIM supply voltage, make sure that there is no MDS F124 in the transmission window of the SLG/SIM antenna. Table 4-5 Field data of MDS F124 SLG 80/ SIM 80 ANT F5 SLG 82/ SIM 82/ SLA 81 SLA 82 0 to 240 mm 0 to 65 mm 0 to 140 mm Limit distance (Sg) 280 mm 80 mm 160 mm Transmission window (L) 280 mm 70 mm 120 mm Minimum distance from MDS to MDS w1m w 0.3 m w 0.6 m Operating distance (Sa) Dimensions (in mm) 3.05 30"0.2 Figure 4-2 1"0.2 Dimensions of the MDS F124 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 4-5 Mobile Data Memories Metal-free space Mounting on Metal Metal Data memory Non-metal h > 50 mm 1 1 With the "ANT F5 without metal" configuration, the MDS F124 must be mounted with a distance of w 150 mm to metal. See chapter 3.4.2. Non-adherence to this value may cause transmission gaps in the field. Flush installation of the MDS in metal is not permitted in combination with SLG 80/SIM 80! Figure 4-3 Metal-free space for the MDS F124 Note Underranging the guideline values (h) will significantly decrease the field data. See chap. 3.4.2. Mounting of the MDS with metal screws (M3 cylinder head) is possible. This does not noticeably reduce its range. A test is recommended for critical applications. For installation in metallic environment, read and adhere to the information in chapter 3.4.2. 4-6 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Mobile Data Memories 4.3 MDS F125 Ordering data Figure 4-4 MDS F125 Table 4-6 Ordering data for MDS F125 Order No. MDS F125 mobile data memory 40-bit fixed code Technical data Table 4-7 6GT2 400-1CF00 Technical data of MDS F125 Memory size 40 bits (ID no., 5 bytes) Memory organization Fixed code Multi-tag capability No MTBF 2.5 x 106 hours Read cycles Unlimited Read distance See field data. Vibration 20 g Shock 100 g Torsion and bending stress Not permitted Direction dependency No Securing of MDS Adhesive, M4 screw Turning moment at + 20 C v 1Nm Protection rating in acc. w. EN 60529 IP67 Physical design Pressed, impact-proof epoxide material Color Black Material Epoxide material Dimensions (D x H) in mm 50 x 1 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 4-7 Mobile Data Memories Table 4-7 Technical data of MDS F125 Ambient temperature During operation During transportation and storage Weight (approx.) ! Field data -25 C to +100 C -40 C to +130 C 5g Caution When switching through the SLG/SIM supply voltage, make sure that there is no MDS F125 in the transmission window of the SLG/SIM antenna. Table 4-8 Field data of MDS F125 SLG 80/ SIM 80 ANT F5 SLG 82/ SIM 82/ SLA 81 SLA 82 0 to 380 mm 0 to 110 mm 0 to 180 mm Limit distance (Sg) 420 mm 140 mm 200 mm Transmission window (L) 280 mm 70 mm 120 mm Minimum distance from MDS to MDS w1m w 0.4 m w 0.8 m Operating distance (Sa) Dimensions (in mm) 4.2 1+0.2 50+0.2 Figure 4-5 4-8 Dimensions of the MDS F125 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Mobile Data Memories Metal-free space Mounting on metal Data memory Metal Non-metal h > 50 mm Flush installation of the MDS in metal is not permitted in combination with SLG 80/SIM 80! Figure 4-6 Metal-free space for the MDS F125 Note Underranging the guideline values (h) will significantly decrease the field data. See chap. 3.4.2. Mounting of the MDS with metal screws (M4 screw) is possible. This does not noticeably reduce its range. A test is recommended for critical applications. For installation in metallic environment, read and adhere to the information in chapter 3.4.2. MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 4-9 Mobile Data Memories 4.4 MDS F160 Application area Ordering data The MDS F160 mobile data memory was especially developed for rugged use by laundries and cleaners. A laundry tag with a limited life is available for cyclic applications. Primary uses: S Rental work clothes S Surgical textiles, hospital clothes S Hotel laundry S Rental laundry S Mats Figure 4-7 MDS F160 Table 4-9 Ordering data for MDS F160 Ordering Data Mobile data memory MDS F160 40-bit fixed code Technical data 4-10 Table 4-10 6GT2 400-1GA00 Technical data for MDS F160 Memory size 40 bits (ID number) Memory organization Fixed code Multi-tag capability No Read cycles Unlimited Read distance See field data. Direction dependency No Mounting of the MDS Glued, patch, sewn in Protection rating IP68 (20 C, 24 hours, 2 m) Physical design Pressed, shock resistant plastic Color Black Material Epoxy resin Dimensions (D x H) in mm 16 x 3 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Mobile Data Memories Table 4-10 Technical data for MDS F160 Physical resistance Isostatic pressure 300 bar for 5 minutes Axial pressure 800 N Radial pressure 800 N Ambient temperature During operation During transportation and storage -25 C to +85 C -25 C to +100 C for 1000 hours +160 C for 10 hours Resistance to chemicals All chemicals conventionally used in the laundry process Washing cycles, min. 200 Weight, approx. 1.2 g Note The MDS F160 must be given a regeneration time of at least 24 hours between laundry cycles. Field data Table 4-11 Field data for MDS F160 SLG 80/ SIM 80 ANT F51 SLG 82/ SIM 82/ SLA 81 SLA 82 0 to 140 mm 0 to 60 mm 0 to 90 mm Limit distance (Sg) 160 mm 70 mm 120 mm Transmission window (L) 230 mm 40 mm 120 mm Minimum distance from MDS to MDS w1m w 0.3 m w 0.6 m Working distance (Sa) 1 When the MDS F160 is combined with the SLG/SIM 80 ANT F5, a mounting plate of metal at a distance of 100 mm to the antenna (ANT F5) must always be used since otherwise there would be no communication or poor communication. Dimension (in mm) SIEMENS 6GT2 400-1GA00 MDS F160 MOBY F 16"0.1 Figure 4-8 3"0.1 Dimensions of the MDS F160 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 4-11 Mobile Data Memories Metal-free space Mounting on metal Data memory Metal Non metal h 20 mm Flush installation of the MDS in metal is not permitted in combination with SLG 80/SIM 80! Figure 4-9 Metal-free space for the MDS F160 Note Any type of metal (particularly iron and ferromagnetic material) in the vicinity of the MDS and SLG/SIM antennas will affect their functions. The distances to metal described above must be adhered to. Non-adherence to the metal-free space will reduce the limit and working distances. For installation in metallic environment, read and adhere to the information in chapter 3.4.2. 4-12 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Mobile Data Memories 4.5 MDS F415 Ordering data Figure 4-10 MDS F415 Table 4-12 Ordering data for MDS F415 Order No. MDS F415 mobile data memory with 256-byte EEPROM1 1 Technical data 6GT2 400-4BF00 192-byte EEPROM can be used with SLG. 224-byte EEPROM can be used with SIM. Table 4-13 Technical data of MDS F415 Memory size 256 bytes 1 Memory organization Random access Multi-tag capability Yes 2 MTBF 2.5 x 106 hours Read cycles Unlimited Write cycles, minimum 200 000 Write cycles, typical (v + 40 C) u 1 000 000 Read/write distance See field data. Vibration 20 g Shock 100 g Torsion and bending stress Not permitted Direction dependency No Securing of MDS Adhesive, M4 screw Turning moment at + 20 C v 1Nm Protection rating in acc. w. EN 60529 IP67 Physical design Pressed, impact-proof epoxide material MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 4-13 Mobile Data Memories Table 4-13 Technical data of MDS F415 Color Black Material Epoxide material Dimensions (D x H) in mm 50 x 1 Ambient temperature During operation During transportation and storage Weight (approx.) 1 2 Memory organization of MDS F4xx Field data 5g 192-EEPROM can be used with SLG. 224-byte EEPROM can be used with SIM. See chap. 6.8 on the data structure of the MOBY F data memory MDS F4xx. Only in combination with SIM 80 ANT F5 Table 4-14 Memory organization of the MDS F4xx1 Address in Memory 1 Description 0 to 3 Serial number, fixed code; can be read with SLG/SIM 4 to 15 Configuration and key; only possible with SIM 80 ANT F5 16 to 31 Password assignment; only possible with SIM 80 ANT F5 32 to 63 User data; only possible with SIM 80 ANT F5 64 to 127 Read/write memory for use as desired; for user data with SLG/ SIM; this area can be configured (password assignment) when SIM 80 ANT F5 is used. 128 to 255 Read/write memory for use as desired; for user data with SLG/ SIM; this area cannot be configured. See chap. 6.8 on the data structure of the MOBY F data memory MDS F4xx. Table 4-15 Field data of MDS F415 SLG 80/ SIM 80 ANT F5 SLG 82/ SIM 82/ SLA 81 SLA 82 0 to 300 mm 15 to 90 mm 20 to 150 mm Limit distance (Sg) 340 mm 110 mm 180 mm Transmission window (L) 280 mm 70 mm 120 mm Minimum distance from MDS to MDS w1m1 w1m w1m Operating distance (Sa) 1 4-14 -25 to +100 C -40 to +130 C The minimum distance can be reduced with SIM 80 ANT F5 during multi-tag operation. The MDSs can be located next to each other. MDS overlapping is not permitted. MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Mobile Data Memories Dimensions (in mm) 4.2 1+0.2 50+0.2 Figure 4-11 Metal-free space Dimensions of the MDS F415 Mounting on metal Data memory Metal Non-metal h > 50 mm Flush installation of the MDS in metal is not permitted in combination with SLG 80/SIM 80! Figure 4-12 Metal-free space for the MDS F415 Note Underranging the guideline values (h) will significantly decrease the field data. See chap. 3.4.2. Mounting of the MDS with metal screws (M4 screw) is possible. This does not noticeably reduce its range. A test is recommended for critical applications. For installation in metallic environment, read and adhere to the information in chapter 3.4.2. MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 4-15 Mobile Data Memories 4-16 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Read/Write Devices Read/Write Antennas MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 5 5-1 Read/Write Devices - Read/Write Antennas 5.1 Introduction Application area In combination with the interface module (i.e., ASM), the read/write device (i.e., SLG/SLA) represents the communications interface between a host controller and the mobile data memory (i.e., MDS). The SLG/SLA permits inductive communication with the MDS. The data read from the MDS and the operations to be executed on the MDS are transferred via the serial link to/from the ASM. Layout and functions .A read/write device is the inductive counterpart to a mobile data memory. S Antenna - transmission of the power field and data signals to and from the MDS S Logic - A/D-D/A conversion of the MDS/ASM signals S Communications unit - reliable transmission of data and commands to and from the ASM S Housing - reliable protection against environmental conditions The read/write device (SLG/SLA) receives commands and data from the interface module (ASM) via the serial interface. These commands and data are converted into instructions which trigger operations on the mobile data memory. Powering and communication with the MDS are performed via inductive alternating fields. The information transmitted by the MDS is returned to the ASM via the serial interface. The amount of information which can be transmitted between SLG/SLA and MDS depends on the following factors. S Speed at which the MDS moves past the antenna (so-called crossing window) S Length of the inductive alternating field of the SLG/SLA through which the MDS moves (so-called transmission window) Table 5-1 Overview table, SLG/SLA SLG Type Operating Distance Sa (Depending on MDS) Limit Distance Sg (Depending on MDS) Antenna Dimensions (L x W x H) in mm Protection Rating SLG 80 ANT F5 0 to 380 mm Max. of 420 mm -25 to +60 C 320 x 145 x 100 350 x 350 x 20 IP65 SLG 82 0 to 110 mm Max. of 140 mm -25 to +55 C 205 x 130 x 60 65 x 90 IP40 SLA 81 0 to 110 mm Max. of 140 mm -25 to +70 C - 65 x 90 IP65 SLA 82 0 to 180 mm Max. of 200 mm -25 to +70 C - 150 x 150 x 30 IP65 Definition of IP65 - Protection against penetration of dust (i.e., dust-proof) - Full protection against touch - Protection against water jet 5-2 Temperature Range (During Operation) SLG Dimensions (L x W x H) in mm Definition of IP40 - Protection against penetration of solid foreign bodies with 1.0 mm - Protection against touching dangerous parts with wire - Not protected against penetration by water MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Read/Write Devices - Read/Write Antennas 5.2 SLG 80 ANT F5 Application area Ordering data Technical data The SLG 80 with ANT F5 is designed for applications requiring long operating distances to the MDS. In dynamic operation, the size of the transmission window generated by the ANT F5 permits high crossing speeds. Figure 5-1 Read/write device SLG 80 ANT F5 Table 5-2 Ordering data for the SLG 80 ANT F5 Read/write device SLG 80 ANT F5 6GT2 401-0AF00 Stub lines and accessories See chapter 3.7. Table 5-3 Technical data of SLG 80 ANT F5 Inductive interface to MDS Max. read distances, SLG-MDS F1xx 420 mm r/o (see field data, chap. 3.2) Max. read/write distances, SLG-MDS F4xx 340 mm, r/w Transmission frequency 125 kHz Serial interface to ASM RS 422 Data transmission speed 9600 baud Data line length (max.) 1000 m Line length, antenna (See caution note.) 2 m (can be connected on the SLG side) Supply voltage 1 (via separate power plug connector) Nominal value Permissible range MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 24 V DC, linear regulated power pack or clock-pulsed switching power pack (160 to 200 kHz) 20 to 30 V DC 5-3 Read/Write Devices - Read/Write Antennas Table 5-3 Technical data of SLG 80 ANT F5 Current consumption at room temperature Max. of 1.5 A 600 mA (typical) Switchon current, brief Operation (at 24 V) 1 x 105 hours MTBF Housing Dimensions (in mm) For antenna head (L x W x H) 350 x 350 x 20 For electronics w/o plug (L x W x H) 320 x 145 x 100 Color Antenna SLG housing Anthracite Anthracite Material Antenna SLG housing Aluminum Aluminum Plug connection (data) 9-pole submin plug connector (pin on device side) Plug connection (counter plug for voltage supply; is included with the SLG.) M12 4-pole device plug connector (IP65) Protection rating in acc. w. EN 60529 5-4 IP652 Antenna IP65 Shock in acc. w. EN 60721-3-7, class 7M2 Total shock-response spectrum, type II 30 g Vibration in acc. w. EN 60721-3-7, class 7M2 1g 1.5 g Mounting of SLG 4 M6 screws Mounting of antenna Min. of 4 M6 screws Turning moment (at room temperature) v 3 Nm Ambient temperature During operation During transportation and storage -25 to +60 C -40 to +85 C Weight (SLG) Approx. 3600 g Weight (antenna) Approx. 1200 g 1 2 ! SLG housing (9 to 200 Hz) (200 to 500 Hz) SLG power supply cannot be connected via the ASM. IP65 only with special plug 6GT2 490-1AA00 (see chap. 3.7.2). Caution The antenna cable is prefabricated. Modification of the cable will invalidate the warranty and CE/BZT certification. MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Read/Write Devices - Read/Write Antennas Field data Table 5-4 Field data of SLG 80 ANT F5 Operating distance (Sa) 0 to 380 mm (See table 3-4.) Limit distance (Sg) 420 mm (See table 3-4.) Transmission window (L) 280 mm (See table 3-4.) Minimum distance from ANT F5 to ANT F5 (D) See figure 5-4. FCC information ! Warning Do not make changes on the devices. Violation will invalidate interference emission certification (FCC) and the manufacturer 's warranty. Note This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: S Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. S Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. S Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. S Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. ! Caution Use of a shielded cable for any kind of connection cable is absolutely necessary. The cable shield must be secured with a shield clamp directly on the interface module and grounded via a grounding rail. MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 5-5 Read/Write Devices - Read/Write Antennas Transmission window OOOOOOO OOOOOOO OOOOOOO OOOOOOO OOOOOOO OOOOOOO OOOOOOO OOOOOOO OOOOOOO OOOOOOO OOOOOOO OOOOOOO MDS Transmission window View of side Sa Sg SLG 80 ANT F5 Metal plate (spacing kit) View of top L Figure 5-2 Transmission window of the SLG 80 ANT F5 Metal-free space Metal-free space with flush installation a = 100 mm Metal a a a a h = 100 mm (non-metallic spacer holder) Figure 5-3 5-6 Metal-free space for SLG 80 ANT F5 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Read/Write Devices - Read/Write Antennas Definition of distance D Da SLG 80 ANT F5 SLG 80 ANT F5 Db SLG 80 ANT F5 Da 1.5 m (for MDS F1xx)/ 5 m (for MDS F4xx) Db 1.5 m (for MDS F1xx)/ 5 m (for MDS F4xx) Figure 5-4 Distance D for SLG 80 ANT F5 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 5-7 Read/Write Devices - Read/Write Antennas Dimensions (in mm) Anti-kink cable protector, flexible in all directions Cable length 2m Minimum bending radius: 20 mm 7 10 12 7 290 320 280 1 140 125 145 A View A 280 350 20 100 40 25 52.5 Figure 5-5 Note The SLG must be grounded on the grounding screw1 provided. 25 Dimensional diagram of SLG 80 ANT F5 Note To ensure optimal field data even in a metallic environment, the ANT F5 is calibrated at the plant to a distance of 100 mm to metal. 5-8 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Read/Write Devices - Read/Write Antennas Spacer kit for MOBY F ANT F5 Table 5-5 Ordering data for spacer kit MOBY F ANT F5 Order No. Spacer kit for ANT F5 of aluminum with plastic spacers incl. mounting screws 6GT2 690-0AB00 Single Parts Quantity Aluminum plate, 380 x 380 x 2 1 Plastic bolts, 100 x 20 4 Countersunk screws, M5 x 12 4 Pan head screws, M5 x 20 4 Washer for M5 4 Spring ring for M5 4 Aluminum plate: 9 340 380 6 280 300 R10 T=2 Plastic bolts: 100 OOOO Figure 5-6 20 M5 x 20 Dimensional drawing of the spacer kit for MOBY F ANT F5 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 5-9 Read/Write Devices - Read/Write Antennas 4 5 6 2 1 3 Holes for ANT F5 Figure 5-7 5-10 Installation drawing for spacer kit MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Read/Write Devices - Read/Write Antennas 5.3 SLG 82 Basic Device Application area The SLG 82 is a basic middle-of-the-line device. The SLA 81 and SLA 82 can be connected as antennas. These are not included with the SLG basic device. The maximum length of the line between antenna and evaluation unit is 55 m. The 5-m connection cable from the antenna to the evaluation unit is not included with the SLG 82 basic device. Figure 5-8 Read/write, SLG 82 basic device Ordering data Table 5-6 Ordering data for the SLG 82 basic device Read/write SLG 82 basic device with serial interface RS 422, for SLA 81 or SLA 82 (SLA not included) To be operated on the following interfaces: ASM 400, ASM 410, ASM 450, ASM 452, ASM 470, ASM 473 and ASM 475 6GT2 499-1BC00 Accessories: Wide-range power pack, 100 to 230 V AC/ 24 V DC, 2.2 A (without 24 V stub line) 6GT2 494-0AA00 Adapter floor plate for top hat rail mounting 6GT2 390-0BA00 Stub lines and accessories See chap. 3.7. MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 5-11 Read/Write Devices - Read/Write Antennas Technical data Table 5-7 Technical data of the SLG 82 basic device Inductive interface to the MDS Read/write distances between SLG and MDS, max. Varies with antenna (see field data) Transmission frequency 125 kHz Serial interface to the ASM RS 422 Data transmission rate 9600 Baud Data line length to the ASM, max. 1000 m Line length to antenna Max. of 55 mm (can be connected on both sides) Supply voltage Via separate power plug (not included, see accessories) Nominal value Permissible range 24 V DC 20 to 30 V DC Current consumption Max. of 1.1 A 250 mA, typical Power-on current, brief Operation (at 24 V DC) 1 x 105 hours MTBF (at +40 C) Housing Dimensions (in mm) Electronics without plug (L x W x H) 205 x 130 x 60 Color Anthracite Material Aluminum Plug connection Data (RS 422) 9-pin, submin D plug (pins on device side) Electronics antenna 9-pin submin D plug (socket on device side) Supply voltage 4-pin M12 on SLG housing (pin) Protection rating in acc. w. EN 60529 IP40 (higher protection ratings on request) Shock in acc. w. EN 60721-3-7/class 7M2 Total shock-response spectrum, type II 30 g Vibration in acc. w. EN 60721-3-7/ class 7M2 1g 1.5 g Mounting of the SLG 4 M5 screws Tightening moment at 20 C 3 Nm Ambient temperature Operation -25 C to +55 C (no condensation) -40 C to +85 C (no condensation) Transportation and storage Weight (without connection cable) 5-12 (9 to 200 Hz) (200 to 500 Hz) 1300 g MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Read/Write Devices - Read/Write Antennas Pin allocations and switches An SLA 81 or SLA 82 can be connected to the SLG 82 basic device. RxD PRE ERR Plugs to the SLA Socket Designation 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 + 6.6 V + Send + Receive CLK + - Receive - Send Ground (0 V) + 24 V CLK - Housing Cable shield RxD: SLG with command active PRE: "Presence" shows the presence of an MDS in the transmission window (only valid when a command is queued). ERR: Error indication with flashing LED Flashing of the ERR-LED Figure 5-9 Meaning 1x Startup message (flashes once during startup) 3x Connection error or field interference 6x Calibration error 20x Hardware error Serial interface of the SLG 82 basic device to the SLA ON: 24 V are present (green) on the SLG/SIM. SERIAL DC 24 V SF/BF: System fault, (red) fault RAM error ACT: This LED is on (green) while a command is being processed. SF/BF ON ACT ON 24 V DC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Switches 1 to 7: Reserved Switch 8: Interface setting ON: RS 422 (operation) OFF: RS 232 (only for download) Pin 2 1 3 4 1 2 3 4 Designation Ground + 24 V + 24 V Ground SERIAL Pins RS 232 1 RS 422 Switch 10: Firmware download ON: Download OFF: Operation 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Housing Free Free Free Free TxD (send) RxD (receive) Ground (0 V) Free Free Cable shield Cable shield +RxD +TxD Free -TxD -RxD Ground (0 V) Cable shield Free Cable shield Switches 11, 12: Free 1 Interface RS 232 only for download Switch 9: MDS parameterization ON: MDS F1xx (r/o) OFF: MDS F4xx (r/w) Figure 5-10 Serial interfaces of the SLG 82 basic device to the user MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 5-13 Read/Write Devices - Read/Write Antennas Dimensions (in mm) 205 130 Grounding bolts M4 Figure 5-11 Dimensional drawing of SLG 82 basic device without mounting holes Adapter floor plate for top hat rail mounting Item 3 Quantity 1 Floor plate 1 2 Profile section 1 3 Oval head screw (M5 x 10) 4 4 Washer (A5.3) 4 5 Countersunk screw (M4 x 10) 2 4 5 Designation 1 2 Figure 5-12 Mounting drawing of the adapter floor plate Note The profile section (item 2) can be turned by 90 on the floor plate to adjust to the concrete mounting conditions. 5-14 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Read/Write Devices - Read/Write Antennas 5.4 SLG 82 Application area Ordering data Technical data The SLG 82 is a medium-end, read/write device with a remote antenna. The cable between antenna and evaluation unit may be up to 55 m in length. The antenna head can be positioned very precisely for every application with two screw nuts. Mixed operation in systems with the SLG 80 is possible (but without DSP/ FFT command). The connection cable from the antenna to the evaluation unit is included with the SLG 82 (length: 5 m). Figure 5-13 Read/write device SLG 82 Table 5-8 Ordering data of the SLG 82 SLG 82 read/write device with serial interface RS 422 and an SLA 81 6GT2 401-2CB00 Adapter floor plate for top hat rail mounting for SLG 82 6GT2 390-0BA00 Stub lines and accessories See chap. 3.7. Table 5-9 Technical data of the SLG 82 Inductive interface to the MDS Max. SLG-MDS read/write distances 140 mm (see field data) Transmission frequency 125 kHz Serial interface to the ASM RS 422 Data transmission speed 9600 baud Data line length to ASM (max.) 1000 m Line length to the antenna Max. of 55 m (can be plugged on both sides) MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 5-15 Read/Write Devices - Read/Write Antennas Table 5-9 Technical data of the SLG 82 Voltage supply With separate power plug (not included with the SLG 82) Nominal value Permissible range 24 V DC 20 to 30 V DC Current consumption Max. of 1.1 A 250 mA (typical) Switch-on current (brief) Operation (at 24 V DC) 1 x 105 hours MTBF (at +40 C) Housing Dimensions (in mm) Antenna with threading and plug ( x L) 65 x 90 Threading on plug side ( x incline x L) M30 x 1.5 x 40 Electronics without plug (L x W x H) 205 x 130 x 60 Color (antenna) (SLG housing) Anthracite/pastel turquoise Anthracite Material (antenna) (SLG-Gehause) Krastin Aluminum Plug connection Data (RS 422) 9-pole, submin. D plug (pins on device side) Electronics antenna 9-pole, submin. D plug (socket on device side) Voltage supply 4-pole, M12 on SLG housing (pin) Protection rating in acc. w. EN 60529 SLG housing IP40 (higher protection rating on request) Antenna IP65 Shock in acc. w. EN 60721-3-7/class 7M2 Total shock-response range, type II 30 g Vibration in acc. w. EN 60721-3-7/ class 7M2 1g 1.5 g Mounting of SLG 4 M5 screws Tightening moment at 20 C v 3 Nm Mounting of antenna 2 plastic nuts (M30 x 1.5) Ambient temperature Antenna Operation Transportation and storage -25 C to +70 C -40 C to +85 C SLG housing Operation Transportation and storage (9 to 200 Hz) (200 to 500 Hz) -25 C to +55 C (no condensation) -40 C to +85 C (no condensation) Weight (without connection cable) SLG Antenna 5-16 1300 g 150 g MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Read/Write Devices - Read/Write Antennas Field data Table 5-10 Field data of SLG 82 Working distance (Sa) 0 to 110 mm Limit distance (Sg) 140 mm Diameter of transmission window (Ld) 70 mm Minimum distance from SLA to SLA (D) See figure 5-16. Transmission window Transmission window Ld Ld sa sg View of top View of side Figure 5-14 Transmission window of SLG 82 with SLA 81 Metal-free space 20 20 40 IIIIIIIIIII IIIIIIIIIII IIIIIIIIIII IIIIIIIIIII IIIIIIIIIII IIIIIIIIIII IIIIIIIIIII IIIIIIIIIII IIIIIIIIIII IIIIIIIIIII IIIIIIIIIII MOBY F SLA 81 6GT2 401-2BB00 Metal-free space with flush installation View of top Note: Non-adherence to metal-free space will reduce limit and working distances. Figure 5-15 View of side Metal-free space for SLG 82 with SLA 81 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 5-17 Read/Write Devices - Read/Write Antennas Definition of distance D SLA 81 SLA 81 Da Db Da w 400 mm (for MDS F1xx) / w 1.2 m (for MDS F4xx) Db w 800 mm (for MDS F1xx) / w 2.4 m (for MDS F4xx) SLA 81 Figure 5-16 Pin allocations and switches Distance D: SLG 82 RxD PRE ERR Plug connector to SLA Socket 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Hous. RxD: SLG active with command Designation + 6.6 V + Send + Receive CLK + - Receive - Send Ground (0 V) + 24 V CLK - Cable shield PRE: Presence indicates the presence of an MDS in the transmission window (only valid when a command is queued). ERR: Error indicated by flashing LED Flashing Meaning of the ERR-LED 1x The SLG has started up and still has not received a RESET from the ASM. 3x The connection between SLG and ASM has malfunctioned. 6x The SLA 81/SLA 82 is malfunctioning (positioned incorrectly or defective). 20x Hardware error: Turn SLG off/on. If error continues to occur SLG is defective. Figure 5-17 5-18 Serial interface of SLG 82 to SLA 81 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Read/Write Devices - Read/Write Antennas ON: 24 V present (green) on SLG SERIAL SF/BF SF/BF: System fault/ (red) bus fault, RAM fault DC 24 V ON ACT: This LED goes (green) on while a command is being executed. ACT ON 24 V DC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Pin Switches 1 to 7: Reserved Switch 8: Interface setting ON: RS 422 (operation) OFF: RS 232 (only for download) 1 3 4 Switch 10: Firmware download ON: Download OFF: Operation Ground + 24 V + 24 V Ground RS 232 1 RS 422 Not used Not used Not used Not used TxD (send) RxD (receive) Ground (0 V) Not used Cable shield +RxD +TxD Not used -TxD -RxD Ground (0 V) Cable shield 9 Not used Hous. Cable shield Switch 11, 12: Not used 1 2 3 4 Designation SERIAL Pins 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Switch 9: MDS parameterization ON: MDS 1xx (r/o) OFF: MDS 4xx (r/w) Figure 5-18 2 Not used Cable shield 1 RS 232 interface only for download Serial interface of SLG 82 to user Dimensions (in mm) 205 130 Grounding bolt, M4 Figure 5-19 Drawing of SLG 82's housing MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 5-19 Read/Write Devices - Read/Write Antennas 65 34 Antenna side 25 12 90 Mounting nuts 40 8-pole pin plug (M12) Threading M30 x 1.5 Figure 5-20 Drawing of antenna for SLG 82 (SLA 81) Adapter floor plate for top hat rail mounting Item 3 Quantity Floor plate 1 2 Profile section 1 3 Oval head screw (M5 x 10) 4 4 Washer (A5.3) 4 5 Countersunk screw (M4 x 10) 2 4 5 Designation 1 1 2 Figure 5-21 Drawing of mounting of adapter floor plate Note The profile section (item 2) can be turned by 90 and mounted to allow for adjustment to the actual situation. 5-20 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Read/Write Devices - Read/Write Antennas 5.5 SLA 81 Application area Ordering data Technical data The SLA 81 is a read/write device in the medium performance range. It permits greater distances to the evaluation unit (SLG, SIM or ASM). The cable between antenna and evaluation unit may be up to 55 m in length. The antenna head can be positioned very precisely for every application with two screw nuts. The SLA 81 is used with the following components: SLG 82, SIM 82, ASM 824, ASM 850 and ASM 854. Figure 5-22 Read/write device SLA 81 Table 5-11 Ordering data of the SLA 81 SLA 81 read/write antenna 6GT2 401-2BB00 Mounting clamp for SLA 81 3SX6 284 Stub lines and accessories See chap. 3.7. Table 5-12 Technical data of the SLA 81 Inductive interface to the MDS Max. SLG/SIM/ASM-MDS read/write distances 140 mm (see field data) Transmission frequency 125 kHz Serial interface to the evaluation unit RS 422 Data transmission speed (SLA - evaluation unit) 2 kbaud (gross) Data line length to SLG/SIM/ASM (max.) 55 m MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 5-21 Read/Write Devices - Read/Write Antennas Table 5-12 Technical data of the SLA 81 Voltage supply (only via evaluation unit) 6.6 V DC Current consumption at room temperature 180 mA (typical) Antenna Dimensions (in mm) Field data 5-22 Antenna with threading and plug ( x L) 65 x 90 Threading on plug side ( x incline x L) M30 x 1.5 x 40 Color Pastel turquoise Material Krastin Plug connection 8-pole M12 plug (pin on device side) Standard connection cable to evaluation unit 5m Protection rating in acc. w. EN 60529 IP65 Shock in acc. w. EN 60721-3-7/class 7M2 Total shock-response range, type II 30 g Vibration in acc. w. EN 60721-3-7/class 7M2 2g 5g Mounting of SLA 81 2 plastic nuts (M30 x 1.5) Ambient temperature Operation Transportation and storage -25 C to +70 C -40 C to +85 C Weight (without connection cable) 150 g Table 5-13 (3 to 200 Hz) (200 to 500 Hz) Field data of SLA 81 Working distance (Sa) 0 to 110 mm Limit distance (Sg) 140 mm Diameter of transmission window (Ld) 70 mm Minimum distance from SLA to SLA (D) See figure 5-25 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Read/Write Devices - Read/Write Antennas Transmission window Transmission window Ld Ld sa sg View of top View of side Figure 5-23 Transmission window of SLA 81 Metal-free space 20 20 40 IIIIIIIIIII IIIIIIIIIII IIIIIIIIIII IIIIIIIIIII IIIIIIIIIII IIIIIIIIIII IIIIIIIIIII IIIIIIIIIII IIIIIIIIIII IIIIIIIIIII IIIIIIIIIII MOBY F SLA 81 6GT2 401-2BB00 Metal-free space with flush installation View of top Note: Non-adherence to metal-free space will reduce limit and working distances. Figure 5-24 View of side Metal-free space for SLA 81 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 5-23 Read/Write Devices - Read/Write Antennas Definition of distance D SLA 81 SLA 81 Da Db SLA 81 Da w 400 mm (for MDS F1xx) / w 1.2 m (for MDS F4xx) Db w 800 mm (for MDS F1xx) / w 2.4 m (for MDS F4xx) Figure 5-25 Distance D: SLA 81 Dimensions (in mm) 65 34 Antenna side 25 12 90 Mounting nuts 40 8-pole pin plug (M12) Threading (M30 x 1.5) Figure 5-26 5-24 Dimensional drawing of SLA 81 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Read/Write Devices - Read/Write Antennas Optional mounting clamp 30 5 18 36 29 5 58 42.5 30 19.5 Figure 5-27 Dimensional drawing of the mounting clamp Figure 5-28 Drawing of mounting of SLA 81 with mounting clamp MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 5-25 Read/Write Devices - Read/Write Antennas 5.6 SLA 82 Application area Ordering data Technical data The SLA 82 is a middle-of-the-line read/write antenna. It permits a greater distance to the evaluation unit (SLG, SIM or ASM). The maximum line length between antenna and evaluation unit is 55 m. The SLG 82 can be connected to the following components: SLG 82 basic device, SIM 82, ASM 824, ASM 850 and ASM 854. Figure 5-29 SLA 82 read/write antenna Table 5-14 Ordering data of the SLA 82 SLA 82 read/write antenna 6GT2 401-2AA00 Stub lines and accessories See chap. 3.7. Table 5-15 Technical data of the SLA 82 Inductive interface to the MDS Max. read/write distances between SLG and MDS 200 mm (see field data) 5-26 Transmission frequency 125 kHz Serial interface to the evaluation unit RS 422 Data transmission rate (SLA - evaluation unit) 2 kBaud (gross) Max. data line length to the ASM 55 m Supply voltage (only via evaluation unit) 6.6 V DC Current consumption at room temperature 180 mA, typical MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Read/Write Devices - Read/Write Antennas Table 5-15 Technical data of the SLA 82 Antenna Field data Dimensions without plug (L x W x H in mm) 150 x 150 x 30 Color Anthracite Material Plastic, PA 12 Plug connection 8-pin, M12 plug (pin on the device side) Standard connection cable to the evaluation unit (see accessories) 5m Protection rating in acc. w. EN 60529 IP65 Shock in acc. w. EN 60721-3-7/class 7M2 Total shock-response spectrum, type II 30 g Vibration in acc. w. EN 60721-3-7/class 7M2 2g 5g Mounting of the SLA 82 2 M6 screws Ambient temperature Operation Transportation and storage -25 C to +70 C -40 C to +85 C Weight without connection cable, approx. 500 g Table 5-16 (3 to 200 Hz) (200 to 500 Hz) Field data of the SLA 82 Working distance (Sa) 0 to 180 mm Limit distance (Sg) 200 mm Diameter of the transmission field (Ld) 120 mm Minimum distance from SLA to SLA (D) See figure 5-32. MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 5-27 Read/Write Devices - Read/Write Antennas Transmission window Transmission window MDS OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO Sa Sg Side view SLA 82 View of top L (Sa,max) = Ld L (Sa,min) 1 1 Figure showing principle Figure 5-30 Metal-free space The transmission window may increase when Sa, min. Transmission window of the SLA 82 Metal-free space with flush mounting a = 50 mm Metal a a a a H = 30 mm (non-metallic surface) Figure 5-31 5-28 Metal-free area of SLA 82 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Read/Write Devices - Read/Write Antennas Definition of the distance D SLA 82 SLA 82 D D SLA 82 D 1.2 m for MDS F1xx D 2.5 m for MDS F4xx Figure 5-32 Dimensions (in mm) Distance D: SLA 82 30 150 20 10 150 130 20 130 6.5 8-pin, M12 pin plug Figure 5-33 Dimensional drawing of SLA 82 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 5-29 Read/Write Devices - Read/Write Antennas 5-30 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Interfaces MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 6 6-1 Interfaces 6.1 Introduction Application area ASM interfaces provide the link between MOBY E components (i.e., SLG/ SLA/MDS) and higher level controllers (e.g., SIMATIC S5/S7), PCs or computers. Up to four SLGs/SLAs can be connected depending on the interface used. Layout and functions An ASM consists of a microcontroller system with its own program stored on a PROM. The CPU receives commands via the user interface and stores these in the RAM. The user receives an acknowledgment that the command has arrived. When the command is correct, the CPU begins execution. Overview Table 6-1 ASM Type Overview of the interfaces Interfaces to PC/Computer Interfaces to SLG/ SLA Function Blocks SLG/ SLA Connections ASM 400 Can be installed in S5-115-155U 9-pole sub D socket ASM 410 Can be installed in S5-100U/ ET 200U Can be connected via bus module 2 (multiplex) ASM 450 To PROFIBUS DP (screw connection) 2x5-pole FC 45 prox. FC 46 switch FB 240 plug connectors ASM 452 PROFIBUS DPV1 2x5-pole prox. switch plug ASM 470 Dimensions (WxHxD in mm) Protection Rating 0 to + 55 C IP00 45 x 135 x 100 0 to + 60 C IP20 2 (multiplex) 134 x 110 x 55 0 to + 55 C IP65 FC 45 2 (quasiparallel) 134 x 110 x 55 0 to +55 C IP67 Can be installed in S7-300/ ET 200M Via FC 47 screw ter- FB 47 minals 2 (multiplex) 45 x 125 x 120 0 to + 60 C IP20 ASM 473 Can be plugged into ET 200X 2x5-pole prox. switch plug FC 45 1 87 x 110 x 55 0 to +55 C IP67 ASM 475 Can be plugged into S7-300/ ET 200M via screw- type terminals FC 45 2 (parallel) 40 x 125 x 120 0 to +60 C IP20 ASM 824 RS 232/422 9-pole sub D socket 9-pole sub D socket MOBY API (DLL) 4x SLA 8x (parallel) 205 x 130 x 60 -25 to +55 C IP40 6-2 FB 250/230/ 1 per CM 252 4 per ASM Temperature Range (During Operation) MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Interfaces Table 6-1 ASM Type Overview of the interfaces Interfaces to PC/Computer Interfaces to SLG/ SLA Function Blocks ASM 850 PROFIBUS DPV1 9-pole sub D socket 9-pole sub D socket FC 45 1x SLA 8x 205 x 130 x 60 -25 to +55 C IP40 ASM 854 PROFIBUS DPV1 9-pole sub D socket 9-pole sub D socket FC 45 4x SLA 8x (parallel) 205 x 130 x 60 -25 to +55 C IP40 SIM 80 ANT F5 RS 232 9-pole sub D plug connector Integrated C-Lib (DLL) - 320 x 145 x 100 350 x 350 x 20 -25 to + 60 C IP65 SIM 82 RS 232/422 9-pole sub D socket 9-pole sub D socket C-Lib (DLL) 1x SLA 8x 205 x 130 x 60 -25 to +55 C IP40 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 SLG/ SLA Connections Dimensions (WxHxD in mm) Temperature Range (During Operation) Protection Rating 6-3 Interfaces 6.2 ASM 400 6.2.1 Overview Application area ASM 400 interfaces can be directly installed and operated in the following SIMATIC S5 programmable controllers. S S5-155U/F (all CPUs) S S5-135U (all CPUs) S S5-155U/H (all CPUs) Layout and function ASM 400 interfaces consist of the basic module in double Europe format and the CM 422 channel submodule. The basic module can be equipped with one to four channel submodules. Mixed configuration is not permitted. The ASM 400 with the CM 422 operates in the I/O area of the SIMATIC S5. When used with function block FB 250, up to 32 channel submodules (i.e., eight 4-channel interfaces) can be operated in one SIMATIC. When FB 252 is used, the maximum number of channel submodules is increased from 32 to 96 per SIMATIC S5. All MDS models can be processed via the FBs. The user addresses the data on the MDS via a command table in the data block. The user addresses user data via absolute addresses. STG ASM 400 with channel submodule CM 422 24V 24V SLG 6-4 24V SLG SLG SIEMENS SIEMENS SIEMENS MOBY F MOBY F MOBY F MDS Figure 6-1 24V MDS MDS SLG SIEMENS MOBY F MDS Configurator of ASM 400 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Interfaces Communication between ASM 400 and user program Communication time between ASM 400 and user depends on two factors. S Cycle time and type of programmable controller S Software used (i.e., FB 250) Communication between ASM 400 and user can be divided into three steps. S The user issues a command and starts it. The next time the FB is called, the command is transferred to the ASM and acknowledged by the ASM. S The ASM executes the command with the MDS. The user and the FB are in wait status. Data communication with the MDS begins as soon as an MDS enters the transmission window of the SLG. The MDS data are stored intermediately on the ASM and checked for correctness. S ASM communication with the MDS is concluded. When the FB is called the next time, the data which have been read or written are transferred from the ASM to the user. The user receives a finished message. Ordering data Table 6-2 Ordering data of ASM 400 Order No. ASM 400 interface consisting of basic module and CM 422 channel module Basic module with connection to STG, with 4 slide-in slots for CM 422 channel module, without channel module 6GT2 002-0AA00 CM 422 channel module for an ASM 400, with connection for 1 SLG 6GT2 002-0AB00 MOBY software1 6GT2 080-2AA10 Plug, ASM-side, 9-pole, submin D plug (pins) with screw lock for stub line between an ASM 400 and SLG S 1 each S 1 package (10 each) 6GT2 090-0BB00 Stub lines and accessories See chapter 3.7. Description of ASM 400/401 German English Electronically available on "Software MOBY" CD Description of FB 250 for ASM 400 German English Electronically available on "Software MOBY" CD 1 6GT2 090-0BB10 See chapter 7.1. MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 6-5 Interfaces Technical data Table 6-3 Technical data of ASM 400 CM 422 Channel Submodule Serial interface to SLG RS 422 Plug connector 9-pole sub D socket Max. interface/line length RS 422/1000 m, depending on SLG type connectable SLG 1 SLG for each CM Software functions Programming With STEP 5 function block FB 250 Commands Read data, write data, initialize MD Access directly via addresses Supply voltage DC 5/24 V via internal bus Interfaces ASM 400 Interfaces for CM/SLG ASM 400 (max.) 4 CM 422 Interface to STG 4F RS 422, 9-pole sub D socket Interface for 24 V DC 2-pole plug connector (included) Supply voltage1 Nominal value 5/24 V DC Permissible range Internal (at 5 V) 4.75 to 5.25 V DC External (at 24 V) Not required Current consumption (max.) Internal (at 5 V) 1 channel 2 channels 3 channels 4 channels 370 mA 490 mA 610 mA 730 mA Ambient temperature During operation During transportation and storage Rel. humidity at 25 C 0 to +55 C -20 to +70 C Space requirements 1 SEP (1 SEP = 15.24 mm) < 95% Weight (approx.) 1 6-6 ASM 400 0.44 kg CM 422 0.1 kg With MOBY F, the voltage for the SLG cannot be connected via the ASM. MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Interfaces Function block FB 250 Function block FB 250 controls data transmission between the STEP5 program and the ASM 400 interface module. FB 250 can be used on the following "programmable controllers". S 115U/F - CPU 941/942/943/944/945 S 135U-R/S - CPU 928/928B S 155U/H - CPU 948 FB 250 does not use system commands. All MDSs can be processed with FB 250. Primary functions of FB 250 S Convert data from user parameterization structure to structure of an ASM S All communication with the ASM via command data exchange S Error handling: Command repetition; Preparation of errors for the user Chaining of several partial commands into one complete command S Reading and writing with a user command S Any address areas of a mobile data memory can be processed with one command. S Control of PLC cycle load via the user Data transmission between FB and MDS can be subdivided into three phases. S Supply interface with the appropriate command and the data or parameter S Transmit the data between ASM 400 and MDS S Supply S5 with appropriate parameters or data from the interface When the P address area is available, FB 252 also supports operation of the ASM 400 in the expanded Q address area. MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 6-7 Interfaces 6.2.2 Hardware Description Plug connectors and their assignment Metal front plate Connection plug for the STG service and test device 3 LEDs per channel: Red LED Yellow LED Green LED Channel module no. 1 9-pole sub D socket Plug Connector Assignment to SLG or STG Channel module no. 2 Screw for connection of channel module to basic module for EMC operation Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Geh. Designation Not used + Sending + Receiving Not used - Receiving - Sending Ground (0 V) +24 V Not used Cable shield Channel module no. 3 Connection plug for SLG 9-pole sub D plug connector with screw-type lock, order no. 6GT2 090-0BB00 Channel module no. 4 + 24 Volt GND Figure 6-2 24 Volt plug connector (This plug connector is included with the ASM.) Plug connectors and their assignment for ASM 400 Note With the MOBY F, the voltage supply for the SLG cannot be connected via the ASM. 6-8 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Interfaces Switches and plug-in jumpers IIIIIIIIIII IIIIIIIIIII IIIIIIIIIII IIIIIIIIIII IIIIIIIIIII IIIIIIIIIII IIIIIIIIIII Switch 4 1 2 OFF = 0 ON = 1 X20 OFF = 0 ON = 1 8 1 4 1 8 1 x Switch 1 Switch 2 Plug connector for SIMATIC bus Switch 3 Figure 6-3 Address settings x 1 and 2 must always be jumpered on X20. Switches and plug-in jumpers for ASM 400 S4 = Setting of the type of addressing S2 = Setting of the page frame number S3 = Setting of the module address (linear addressing with PESP) S1 = Address setting when PESP is not used Table 6-4 Address settings for ASM 400 with FB 250/252 ASM 400 Switch Setting Start Adress of ASM Switch S3 4321 Switch S4 21 FB 250 Parameterization ADR FB 252 Parameterization KAN* QADR KAN 0 0000 01 0 1-4 16 0001 16 32 0010 48 0011 64 0100 (Corresponds to chanchan nel module 1 to 4) 80 0101 96 0110 112 0111 128 1000 ( (This setting tti of switch 4 must always l be used when the mod le module is operated in standard 128 mode.) 32 Not available 48 64 80 96 112 1-4 128 (Corresponds chan to channel module 1 to 4) 144 144 1001 144 160 1010 160 176 1011 176 192 1100 192 208 1101 208 208 224 1110 224 224 240 1111 240 240 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 160 176 192 6-9 Interfaces Settings on the channel module Hybrid for serial interface CM422 fur ASM 400 Plug-in jumper X20 X21 removed CPU 80C32 EPROM Plug-in jumper X20: S Removed: Normal operation S Inserted: Test operation; dialog to the mobile data memory is aborted earlier when malfunctions occur. This helps to pinpoint weak spots and malfunctions during commissioning. Figure 6-4 6-10 Settings on the channel module MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Interfaces 6.2.3 SIMATIC S5 Configuration Module rack CR 700-0LA (S5-115U) Slot designation MOBY interface module ASM 4001 1 One SIMATIC adapter capsule required for each ASM 400 (order no. 6ES5 491-0LB11) Figure 6-5 CR 700-0LA module rack (S5-115U) Module rack CR 700-0LB (S5-115U) Slot designation MOBY interface module ASM 4001 1 One SIMATIC adapter capsule required for each ASM 400 (order no. 6ES5 491-0LB11) Figure 6-6 CR 700-0LB module rack (S5-115U) Module rack CR 700-1 (S5-115U) Slot designation MOBY interface module ASM 4001 1 One SIMATIC adapter capsule required for each ASM 400 (order no. 6ES5 491-0LB11) Figure 6-7 CR 700-1 module rack (S5-115U) MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 6-11 Interfaces Module rack CR 700-2 (S5-115U) Slot designation MOBY interface module ASM 4001 1 One SIMATIC adapter capsule required for each ASM 400 (order no. 6ES5 491-0LB11) Figure 6-8 CR 700-2 module rack (S5-115U) Module rack CR 700-3 (S5-115U) Slot designation MOBY interface module ASM 4001 1 One SIMATIC adapter capsule required for each ASM 400 (order no. 6ES5 491-0LB11) Figure 6-9 Module rack ER 700-0, ER 701-1 and ER 701-2 CR 700-3 module rack (S5-115U) ASM 400 MOBY interface modules cannot be used. Module rack ER 701-3 Slot designation MOBY interface module ASM 4001 AS 314, AS 310, IM 317 IM 307 or IM 317 (only starting with ER 701-3LA13) 1 One SIMATIC adapter capsule required for each ASM 400 (order no. 6ES5 491-0LB11) Figure 6-10 6-12 ER 701-3 module rack (S5-115U) MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Interfaces Central controller S5-135U/ -155U Slot designation MOBY interface module ASM 400 Figure 6-11 S5-135U/-155U central controller Central controller S5-155U/155H Slot designation MOBY interface module ASM 400 Figure 6-12 S5-155U/-155H central controller Expansion device EG S5-183U Slot designation MOBY interface module ASM 400 Interface 312-3 Interface 310 or 314 Figure 6-13 EG S5-183U expansion device for S5-135U/-155U MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 6-13 Interfaces Expansion device EG S5-184U Slot designation MOBY interface module ASM 400 Interface 312-5 Figure 6-14 EG S5-184U expansion device for S5-135U/155U Expansion device EG S5-185U Slot designation MOBY interface module ASM 400 Interface 314 Figure 6-15 EG S5-185U expansion device for S5-135U/155U/155H Expansion device EG S5-187U Slot designation MOBY interface module ASM 400 Interface 312-5 Figure 6-16 6-14 EG S5-187U expansion device for S5-135U/155U MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Interfaces 6.3 ASM 410 Application area Interface ASM 410 can be used in the SIMATICs listed below. S S5-90U (max. of 2) S S5-95U (max. of 4) S S5-100U (max. of 8) S ET 100U (max. of 2) S ET 200U (max. of 4) Since this ASM can be used with all mobile data memories, read/write devices and the STG service test device, compatibility with all MOBY components is ensured. Layout and function LEDs for status and error indications are located on the front. Interferenceimmune design is provided by the galvanic isolation of the MOBY interface to the SIMATIC S5 bus. The MOBY commands are started and data are fetched by setting and scanning a few control bits in the process image (PIO/ PII), and eight input/output bytes are assigned. In time-multiplex operation, one or two SLGs can be used. The MDS data are accessed via their absolute addresses. Bus module of PLC S5-100U with ASM 410 STG 1 24V 24V SLG SIEMENS MOBY F 1 Not for MOBY F Figure 6-17 MDS SLG SIEMENS MOBY F MDS Configurator for ASM 410 in SIMATIC S5 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 6-15 Interfaces Ordering data Table 6-5 Ordering data of ASM 410 Order No. ASM 410 interface for connection of up to 2 SLGs (without bus module) SIMATIC S5, bus module with terminal block for screw-type connection 6-16 6GT2 002-0BA00 6ES5 700-8MA11 Crimp connection, with crimp contacts, increased EMC resistance 6ES5 700-8MA22 Stub lines and accessories See chapter 3.7. Description of ASM 410 German English Electronically available on "Software MOBY" CD MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Interfaces Technical data Table 6-6 Technical data of ASM 410 Serial interface to SLG RS 422 Connection (max.) 2 SLGs can be connected via a separate bus module Line length (typ. max.) 1000 m/RS 422, depending on SLG and type of cable Number of SLGs S Static operation S Dynamic operation 2 SLGs (8x) 1 SLG (8x) Interface to STG RS 422, 9-pole sub D plug connection Interface for 24 V DC Via a separate bus module Software functions Programming With STEP5 directly via process image (PIO/PII); no function block required; 5 bytes processed per command Commands Select channel 1 or 2, read MDS, write MDS, initialize MDS, etc. Supply voltage1 Nominal value 24 V DC (residual ripple, max. of 10%) Permissible range 20 to 30 V DC Current consumption Internal (at 5 V) Typical 20 to 60 mA (20 mA = long cycle time) (60 mA = short cycle time) Max. 110 mA (PLC in STOP status) External (at 24 V DC) All SLGs, SLG switched off 90 mA Power consumption, typ. (without SLG) 2.5 W Cooling Convection cooling Isolation group C in acc. w. VDE 0110 Protection rating IP20 in acc. w. IEC 529 Physical stress IEC 68-2-27 Ambient temperature During operation S Horizontal SIMATIC layout y S Vertical SIMATIC layout 0 to +60 C During transportation and storage -25 to +70 C Weight (approx.) 1 0 to +40 C 0.25 kg With the MOBY F, the voltage supply of the SLG cannot be connected via the ASM. MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 6-17 Interfaces Slots in PLC S5-90U PLC S5-90U provides a maximum of four slots for additional modules. Up to two of these can be used by the ASM 410 module. Slots in PLC S5-95U ASM 410 can only be operated with PLC S5-95U in slots 0 to 7. Up to four modules can be used on one PLC. Starting with CPU release status -8MA-3, 8 modules can be used. Slots in PLC S5-100U S5-100U 6-18 ASM 410 can only be operated with PLC S5-100U in slots 0 to 7. Up to eight modules can be used on one PLC. See the following table for slotoriented addressing. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 64 to 71 72 to 79 80 to 87 88 96 104 112 120 to to to to to 95 103 111 119 127 8 Slot number Address assignment Free slots for additional digital modules MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Interfaces Configuration of ASM 410 in ET 100U The ASM 410 must be operated as an analog module in the ET 100U. When parameterizing the module with the "COM ET 100U" software, the module must be specified with "4AX" in the appropriate slot. The ASM 410 occupies eight input bytes and eight output bytes (i.e., 16 bytes). Since a maximum of 32 bytes can be assigned per ET 100U in the address image of the main controller, a maximum of two modules per ET 100U are permitted. When other modules are used with an ET 100U in addition to the ASM 410, only one module can be connected. On the ET 100U, the ASM 410 can be addressed via all address areas of the PLC (i.e., P, Q, IM3 and IM4). SIMATIC C P U Central controller S5-115 U S5-135 U S5-155 U ET 100U Max. cable length 3000 m Max. of 2 ASM 410s per ET 100U ASM 410 ET 100U DI DO DO Max. of 32 ET 100Us Figure 6-18 Configuration of ASM 410 in ET 200U Configurator for ASM 410 in ET 100U The ASM 410 can be used with the ET 200U under the following conditions. S The ET 200U with an ASM 410 installed must be operated in slow mode. See ET 200U manual for how to set slow mode. S The "COM ET 200U" software is used to parameterize the ASM 410. The ASM 410 module must be parameterized there with "095". S Up to four ASM 410s can be used with one ET 200U. When DI/DO or other periphery is used with the ET 200U, fewer ASM 410s can be used. Otherwise the same conditions as for the ET 100U apply. MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 6-19 Interfaces Physical layout The ASM 410 interface has the same dimensions as any standard module for the SIMATIC S5-100U. The interface can be installed directly on the bus module (6ES5 700-8MA11 or 6ES5 700-8MA21). Ventilation slits of the adapter capsule: Make sure the ventilation slits are not obstructed during operation. Forced module ventilation is not required. Label insert: Short texts in English are on the back. LEDs A1 A2 A3 B1 B2 B3 Fehler aktiv ANW 1.SLG 2.SLG Power 1 2 3 Betriebsart 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 A B Status and error LEDs Operating mode selection switch 6 8 A 4 C 2 0 E normal ECC Testbetr. Test+ECC INIT norm INIT ECC res. res. Plug connector for serial S5 bus TEST 8 1.SLG bzw. 2.SLG 9 res. F 5 9 6 9-pole sub D plug connector for STG with stub line 6GT2091-0B... (screw-type lock), not for MOBY F 1 STG 6 Anschaltmodul MOBY I Coding pin (not visible; on back of module) in position "h" (i.e., analog module) 10-pole plug connector for bus module (24 V supply; SLG connection) 6GT2002-0BA00 1 Figure 6-19 6-20 2 3 4 5 6 ASM 410 interface with operational and indicator elements MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Interfaces Table 6-7 No. Status and error LEDs of ASM 410 Color Meaning A1 Red Error: The last command was concluded with an error, or the hardware of the module is defective. A2 Yellow Rapid irregular flashing indicates running dialog with the SLG or mobile data memory (MDS). This LED is always on when the presence check is enabled. A3 Green Data memory is in the field of the SLG. The SLG which detected the MDS is indicated via LEDs B1-B2. LED is only active when presence check is being used. B1 Green B1 = 1st SLG is in operation. Remember: Only one of the LEDs (i.e., B1 and B2) may be on at a time. If both LEDs are on, check the wiring to the SLG. B2 Green B2 = 2nd SLG is in operation. Remember: Only one of the LEDs (i.e., B1 and B2) may be on at a time. If both LEDs are on, check the wiring to the SLG. B3 Green B3 = power on This LED is always on when 24 V is applied to the module. The interface module can be tested with the STG. Setting the operating mode The operating mode is set with the operating mode selection switch on the front of the ASM. Positions 0 to 7 Setting of the operating mode: ASM 410 uses the serial S5 bus. The STG interface is switched off. Positions 8 to F Test operation with the STG (not for MOBY F): Telegrams from the S5 are no longer processed. Note The serial S5 bus functions are not affected by switching to test operation since this interface has its own microprocessor and is not dependent on MOBY activities. MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 6-21 Interfaces Table 6-8 Switch Setting Short Description on Label Insert Meaning 0 Normal Normal operating mode; read and write all MDS types; ECC driver is disabled. 11 ECC driver Read and write all MDS types; EEC driver is enabled. 2 Test operation All MDS types can be processed during test operation. The ASM 410 performs stricter error checks for communication with the MDS so that weak points and malfunctions can be detected during commissioning. 31 Test + ECC The ECC driver is enabled. Otherwise same as switch setting 2. 4 INIT normal Initializes the MDS. When a write command is started via the process image, an INIT command to the MDS is started. The contents of the MDS are deleted. 51 INIT ECC Initializes the MDS with ECC driver. Otherwise same as switch setting 4. 6 Reserved 7 Reserved 81 Test 1st or 2nd SLG 9 to F Reserved 1 6-22 Operating modes for ASM 410 An STG can be connected via the 9-pole sub D plug connector so that all MOBY E hardware can be tested. Switch settings 1, 3, 5 and 8 cannot be used with MOBY F. MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Interfaces Wiring of one or two SLGs B U S M O D U LE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Mounting rail 9 Terminal strip on bus module 10 Cable shield Shield +24 V Gn 0V Ye Color ID2 for stub lines from Siemens Wh Br 90 to 230V 24V Gr From external power supply 1. SLG grounding screw3 Stub line incl. SLG plug connector and open end with core sleeves 6GT2 491-0D...1 Gn Ye Wh Br Gr Max. cable length = 1000 m 90 to 230V 24V 2. SLG grounding screw3 1 2 3 In acc. with MOBY length key Color ID Gn = green = pin 4 in SLG plug connector; Ye = yellow = pin 5 in SLG plug connector; Wh = white = pin 6 in SLG plug connector; Br = brown = pin 1 in SLG plug connector; Gr = gray = pin 3 in SLG plug connector. The SLG must be grounded on the grounding screw provided. Figure 6-20 Wiring of one or two SLGs for ASM 410 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 6-23 Interfaces 6.4 ASM 450/452 Application area The ASM 450/452 interfaces are modules for operation of MOBY devices via PROFIBUS DP / DPV1 on the following components. S All computers and PCs S All controllers When the interfaces are used on a SIMATIC S7, function blocks are available to the user. Figure 6-21 ASM 450 ASM 452 6-24 ASM 450/452 interface The ASM 450 accesses data on the MDS directly with physical addresses. The ASM 450 uses cyclic operation with function block FB 240 (S5) or FC 44 (S7). Appendix B of the FC 44 description is available to the SIMATIC S5 user. All other users must use the description of the FC 44 function for the ASM 450. Up to 2 SLGs can be connected to one ASM 450. Connection of two SLGs is only recommended when static operation is used. When MDSs are processed while passing by (i.e., dynamic operation), there is usually not enough time to switch over the second SLG. The ASM 452 is the further development of the familiar ASM 450 interface. Use of non-cyclic data communication on PROFIBUS DPV1 ensures that optimum data throughput is achieved even with large PROFIBUS configurations. The minimum cyclic data load of the ASM 452 on PROFIBUS guarantees the user that other PROFIBUS stations (e.g., DI/DQ) can continue to work at very high speeds. Up to 2 SLGs can be run on the ASM 452 in pseudo parallel mode. Pseudo parallel mode means that the user can start one command on 2 SLGs at the same time (via FC 45) although the ASM has only one serial channel. The ASM automatically handles the multiplexing between SLG 1 and SLG 2. MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Interfaces The SLG is processed on which an MDS happens to be. This delays the processing of the second MDS. For this reason, we recommend only processing the MDS statically when 2 SLGs are connected to the ASM. The MDS data are accessed via physical addressing of the MDS. The SIMATIC S7 offers FC 45 for this purpose. FC 45 gives the S7 user an easy-to-use interface with powerful commands (e.g., one command processes an entire MDS; command chaining; S7 data structures with UDTs). The ASM 452 can also be parameterized as a dialog station. Only 1 SLG can be operated on channel 1 in this mode. Available memory (VMDS) is then 1321 bytes. Ordering data Table 6-9 Ordering data for ASM 450/452 ASM 450 interface for PROFIBUS DP, max. of 2 SLGs connectable 6GT2 002-0EB00 ASM 452 interface for PROFIBUS DPV1, max. of 2 SLGs connectable 6GT2 002-0EB20 Accessories Plug connector for PROFIBUS DP connection and 24 V power supply 6ES7 194-1AA01-0XA0 Connection cable ASM 450/452 SLG Length: 2 m 5m 20 m For other lengths see chap. 3.7.4. 6GT2 491-1CH20 6GT2 491-1CH50 6GT2 491-1CN20 Opt. connection plug, ASM 450/452 SLG 6GT2 090-0BC00 M12 covering caps for unused SLG connection (only ASM 450 and ASM 452) 1 package = 10 each 3RX9 802-0AA0 MOBY software 1 with FB 246, FB 240, FC 44, FC 45 GSD file 6GT2 080-2AA10 Other accessories for ASM 450 (network components) See SIMATIC catalog ST 70 and SIMATIC ET 200X manual. Replacement part: Plug connector plate; T-functionality for PROFIBUS connection 6ES7 194-1FC00-0XA0 Description-ASM 450/FC 44 German English French Electronically available on "Software MOBY" CD Description-FC 45 (for ASM 452) German English French Electronically available on "Software MOBY" CD 1 See chapter 7.1. MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 6-25 Interfaces Technical data Table 6-10 Technical data of ASM 450/452 ASM 450 ASM 452 Serial interface to the user PROFIBUS DP PROFIBUS DPV1 Procedure in acc. w. EN 50170, vol. 2, PROFIBUS Connection PG 11 screw connection PROFIBUS and supply voltage plug connectors are not included. Transmission speed 9600 baud to 12 Mbaud (automatic recognition) Max. block length 208 bytes 2 words cyclic/ 240 bytes acyclic Serial interface to the SLG Plug connector 2 coupling plug connectors (M12) Line length (max.) 1000 m, depends on SLG (2 m = standard length, other cables: 5 m, 10 m, 20 m) SLGs which can be connected 2 SLG 8x (multiplex operation) 2 SLG 8x (pseudo parallel mode) Software functions Programming Depends on PROFIBUS DP master Function blocks SIMATIC S5 FB 240 - SIMATIC S7 FC 44 FC 45 MDS addressing Direct access via addresses Direct access via addresses Commands Initialize MDS, read data from MDS, write data to MDS, and so on Initialize MDS, read data from MDS, write data to MDS, and so on Dialog: Normal station/VMDS Yes/No Yes/Yes (Only 1 SLG can be operated on channel 1 in VMDS mode.) Supply voltage1 Nominal value 24 V DC Permissible range 20 to 30 V DC Current consumption 180 mA max., 130 mA typ. (without SLG, DO not loaded) 6-26 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Interfaces Table 6-10 Technical data of ASM 450/452 ASM 450 ASM 452 Digital inputs Number 2 Galvanic isolation Yes None Input voltage For logical "0" 0 to 5 V DC For logical "1" 13 to 30 V DC Input current for signal "1" 7 mA (typ.) Delay time < 10 msec Digital outputs Number 2 Galvanic isolation Yes Max. permissible current 0.5 A Short-circuit protection Yes (electronic) Line length (max.) 30 m None Ambient temperature During operation 0 to +55 C During transportation and storage -40 to +70 C Dimensions (WxHxD) in mm 134 x 110 x 55 (without bus plug) Mounting 4 M5 screws, mounting on any plate or wall Weight (approx.) 0.5 kg Protection rating IP67 MTBF (at 40 C) 30 S 104 hours = 34 years 1 With the MOBY F, the SLG power supply cannot be obtained from the ASM. MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 6-27 Interfaces AT-comp. PC PROFIBUS DP master module (e.g., S7-400 CPU) 2 m* PROFIBUS cable 24 V for ASM To additional PROFIBUS stations 24V 24V 2nd SLG SIEMENS * Standard cable length Figure 6-22 MOBY F MDS 1st SLG SIEMENS MOBY F MDS Configurator of ASM 450/452 Hardware description The ASM 450/452 is equipped with the same housing as the ET 200X decentral I/O device. See ET 200X manual (order no. 6ES7 198-8FA00-8AA0) for general technical information on the ASM 450/452 (e.g., mounting, operation and wiring, and general technical specifications). Accessories and power supply components are also described in this manual. PROFIBUS configuration The ASM 450/452 is integrated in the hardware configuration with a GSD file. The ASM can then be configured via HWCONFIG of the SIMATIC Manager or another PROFIBUS tool. The "Software MOBY" CD contains a separate GSD file for each ASM model. SLG connection technique Since an SLG always occupies two M12 connection sockets on the ASM 450/451/452, a prefabricated cable (cf. figure 6-24 or chapter 3.7) makes it easy to connect the SLG. In its standard version, the connection cable has a length of 2 m. For other cable lengths, see chapter 3.7.4. An SLG plug connector with screw-type terminals is available for users who want to make their own cable (see figure 6-23). Cable and SLG plug connector can be ordered from the MOBY catalog. 6-28 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Interfaces SLG-cable: e.g. LiYC11Y Plug hood removed PG11 screw connection, max. cable diameter = 6.5 mm (Do not tighten screw until plug connector is assembled.) 2 screws to open the plug connector 48 Connector Pin 18.5 Protection rating IP67 Figure 6-23 Coupling connector M12 on ASM 450 Connection to PIN of SLG connector (9-pole submin D) Core Color 1 Green 3 2 White 2 3 Brown 6 4 Yellow 5 5 Gray 7 6 - (nc) - S - (nc) - S Shield 1/8 Connection plug, ASM 450/452 SLG (6GT2 090-0BC00) SLG Side1 ASM Side X1/2 25 X1/3 18.5 X1 X2 Two 5-pole, round M12 plug connectors White Brown 2 6 X1/1 Green 3 X1/4 Yellow 5 9-pole submin D (socket, screw7 type-lock) X2/3 X1/5 X2/5 1 5 6 S S 1 2 3 4 Gray (Shield) 1 8 Caution: If metallized sub D housings are used on the SLG/SIM side, the housing must be connected to the cable shield. Figure 6-24 Connection cable, ASM 450/452 SLG (6GT2 491-1C...) MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 6-29 Interfaces PROFIBUS cable with 24 V power The ASM 450/452 can also be used with the "green" PROFIBUS cable. Make sure that a 24 V cable is installed from X12 to X13. The 24 V line on plug X12 can be connected to pin 5, 6. X12 X13 Figure 6-25 6-30 X12 X11 X13 X11 PROFIBUS cable with 24 V power MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Interfaces SLG and DI/DO configuration for ASM 450/452 Plug x1 x2 x3 x4 Figure 6-26 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th * x1 - x2 SLG - SLG 2xDA SLG x3 - x4 - SLG 2xDE SLG SLG Plug * Config Config 1st 2nd 3rd * x1 - x2 SLG - SLG x3 - x4 - SLG SLG This configuration only applies to static processing of the MDS. SLG and DI/DO configuration for ASM 450/452 The versions shown in figure 6-26 can be set up with the standard cables of MOBY or ET 200X. Note Although the configuration with 2 SLGs + DI + DO is also possible with the ASM 450, the components require special customer-related wiring. The following figure shows a dimensional drawing of an ASM 450/452 with bus connection plugs. You must add the length of the PG screw connection and the radius of the cable used to the total width and depth specified. 110 53.5 28.25 Dimensional drawing of ASM 450/452 with mounting holes O 5.5 120 134 Figure 6-27 90 Dimensional drawing of the ASM 450/452 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 6-31 Interfaces Pin allocation The following figure shows the pin allocation of the ASM 450/452. ASM 450 LEDs for PROFIBUS DP SF: BF: ON: 4 56 X11 SF BF 12 3 4 56 ON DC 24 V X1 2 1 X12 DC 24 V: SLG1 X2 3 RxD 5 LEDs for MOBY and ASM 450 4 ERR ANW DE0 DE1 12 3 4 56 X3 SLG2 X13 System fault (see table 6-11) Bus fault (see table 6-11) Goes on when the logic voltage is applied to the ASM (is generated from the 24 V power supply). Goes on when the 24 V power supply is connected to the ASM. X4 RxD: ANW: ERR: SLG1/2: RxD DE0/1: 12 3 SLG active MDS present or status of DA1 Error indicator or status of DA0 Shows the selected SLG. Only SLG1 or SLG2 can be selected. Status of the digital inputs. ASM 452 LEDs for MOBY and ASM 452 4 56 X11 SF BF ON DC 24 V 12 3 4 56 X1 X12 4 12 3 4 56 SLG1 2 1 X2 3 RxD 5 PRE/ERR 2 DE0 X3 X13 PRE/ERR 1 DE1 SLG2 X4 RxD 12 3 Socket X11 and X12 (PROFIBUS DP) X13 (Power supply) Pin Allocation Socket 1 2 3* 4 5* 6* Signal B (red) PE PE Signal A (green) L+ M X1/X3 1 2 3 4 5 6 PE L+ M PE L+ M X2/X4 * Do not circuit Figure 6-28 RxD: SLG with command active PRE/ERR 1, MDS present or error indicator PRE/ERR 2: MDS present: The LED is permanently ON. If more than one MDS is in the field, the number of the MDS is indicated with a brief LED interruption. There is no error output. Error indicator: The LED is permanently OFF. The last error number is indicated with brief pulses of light. SLG 1: SLG 1 is selected. SLG 2: SLG 2 is selected. Only SLG 1 or SLG 2 can be selected. Pin Allocation (SLG) 1 2 3 4 5 +RxD +TxD TxD RxD PE 1 2 3 4 5 X2 +24 V DA1 0V DA0 PE X4 +24 V DE1 0V DE0 PE Pin allocation and LEDs of ASM 450/452 Note With the MOBY F, the SLG power supply cannot be obtained from the ASM. 6-32 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Interfaces PROFIBUS diagnostics Table 6-11 LEDs for PROFIBUS diagnostics LED "BF" On The following table lists the possible error displays, what they mean and how to eliminate the cause of the fault. LED "SF" * Cause Error handling: S ASM 450/452 is starting up. S The connection to the DP-master has - failed. S The ASM 450/452 cannot detect a trans- S Check the PROFIBUS DP connection. S Check the DP-master. mission rate. S Bus interruption S DP-master is out of operation S Check all the cables in your PROFIBUS DP network. S Check whether the PROFIBUS DP connector is plugged in correctly on the ASM 450/452. Flashes On S The configuration data sent from the DP master to the ASM 450/452 do not correspond to the configuration of the ASM 450/452. Flashes Off S Check the configuration of the ASM 450/452 (input/output, PROFIBUS address). S Correct device master file used? Flashes SIEM80B6.GSD for ASM 452 ASM 450/452 or in the configuration software. S The ASM 450/452 was not configured. S Check the configuration of the S There is a hardware defect on the S Replace the ASM 450/452. ASM 450/452. * SIEM804C.GSD for ASM 450 - S The ASM 450/452 has detected the trans- S Check the PROFIBUS address set on the mission rate but is not addressed by the DP master. On - ASM 450/452 (station type). Status is not relevant Example for bared lengths The following figure shows an example of bared lengths. The lengths are valid for all cables which you can connect to the connection plug. Any shield braiding must be twisted, inserted in a core end sleeve, and the excess cut off. 45 IIIII IIIII IIIII Twisted and trimmed shield braiding 6 Figure 6-29 Length of baring for a PROFIBUS cable MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 6-33 Interfaces PROFIBUS address and terminating resistance The plug plate must be removed from the ASM before you can set the PROFIBUS address or circuit the terminating resistance. The plug plate covers the DIP switches. The following figure shows the location of the DIP switches on the ASM and a sample setting of each. Example: Terminating resistance turned off (status on delivery) on off Example: PROFIBUS address 120 (status on delivery) 23 +24 + 25 + 26 = 8 + 16 + 32 + 64 = 120 ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Figure 6-30 ASM 450 ASM 452 Not Normal operation conn. (use GSD file SIEM80B6) ASM 451-compatible Not (use GSD file conn. SIEM804D) Setting the PROFIBUS address and circuiting the terminating resistance Note S The PROFIBUS address on the ASM 450/452 must always correspond to the PROFIBUS address specified for this ASM with the configuration software. S For correct functioning of the terminating resistance, always switch both DIP switches of the terminating resistance to "On" or "Off". 6-34 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Interfaces 6.5 ASM 470/475 Application area The ASM 470/475 interface can be installed in the SIMATIC S7-300 and ET 200M. It can be used for all MOBY systems. Up to eight ASM 470/475 interfaces can be installed and operated in one module rack of the SIMATIC S7-300. When a layout with several module racks (maximum of four) is used, the ASM 470/475 can be installed and operated in each of these module racks. In a maximum SIMATIC S7-300 configuration, up to 32 ASM can be used centrally. The ASMs can also be used in the distributed I/O ET 200M on PROFIBUS. This makes use in an S7-400 environment possible. Up to 7 ASMs can be operated per ET 200M. Error messages and operational states are indicated with LEDs. Galvanic isolation between SLG and the SIMATIC S7-300 bus ensure layouts which are not as susceptible to interference. Figure 6-31 ASM 470 ASM 470/475 interface In multiplex operation, up to two SLGs can be connected to the ASM 470. The FC 47 function block ensures simple programming via SIMATIC S7 tools. The FC 47 can be used with both the S7-300 and the S7-400. The ET 200M can also be used to operate the ASM 470 in a SIMATIC S5 environment. FB 47 is available for PLCs 115U to 155U. On the hardware side, communication between ASM 470 and the S7-300 CPU is handled by a 16-byte address area so that up to 12 bytes of user data can be transferred with each read/write command. MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 6-35 Interfaces ASM 475 The ASM 475 with the order number 6GT2 002-0GA10 is a parameterizable module. Basic functions of the module are already specified when the module is configured in HW-Config (e.g., normal addressing). ASM 475 (Normal addressing) The ASM 475 accesses the data on the MDS directly with physical addresses. The FC 45 function controls use in a SIMATIC S7. ASM 475 (Filehandler) The filehandler function is not offered by MOBY F. Together the ASM 475 and FC 45 form a unit which can be used to read the MDS data easily and at optimum speed. A 32-Kbyte MDS memory can be read in 24 seconds, almost without regard to the S7 cycle time. ASM 470 ASM 475 Shield connecting element (6ES7 390-5AA00-0AA0) for 2 modules Shield connection terminal (6ES7 390-5BA00-0AA0) 6GT2 491-0E... (see chap. 3.7 or figure 6-34) 24V 24V SLG Figure 6-32 6-36 SLG SIEMENS SIEMENS MOBY F MOBY F MDS MDS Configurator for ASM 470/475 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Interfaces Ordering data Table 6-12 Ordering data for ASM 470/475 Interface ASM 470 for SIMATIC S7-300; 2 SLG multiplex; no front plug 6GT2 002-0FA10 Interface ASM 475 for SIMATIC S7-300; 2 SLG parallel; normal addressing; no front plug 6GT2 002-0GA10 Accessories Front connector (1 per ASM) 6ES7 392-1AJ00-0AA0 Shield connection terminal (1 per SLG cable) 6ES7 390-5BA00-0AA0 Shield connecting element (1 per 2 ASMs) 6ES7 390-5AA00-0AA0 Connection cable, ASM SLG Length: 5m 20 m 50 m 6GT2 491-0EH50 6GT2 491-0EN20 6GT2 491-0EN50 MOBY software1 with FC 47, FB 47 for ASM 470, FC 45 for ASM 475 6GT2 080-2AA10 Description-ASM 470/FC 47 for S7 German English Electronically available on "Software MOBY" CD Description-ASM 470/FB 47 for S5 German Englisch Electronically available on "Software MOBY" CD Description-FC 45 (ASM 475) German Englisch French 1 Electronically available on "Software MOBY" CD See chapter 7.1. MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 6-37 Interfaces Technical data Table 6-13 Technical data of ASM 470/475 ASM 470 ASM Type Interface to S7-300 or ET 200M ASM 475 P-bus; I/O input and I/O output P-bus; cyclic and non-cyclic services Communication 16 bytes I/O 2 words (cyclic); 238 bytes (non-cyclic) Command buffer on ASM 1 x 12 bytes per ASM 70 x 238 bytes per SLG Serial interface to the SLG Plug connector Via screw terminals on front plug Front plug connector is not included. Line length, max. Standard cable = 2 m, 5 m, 10 m, 20 m, 50 m (up to 1000 m on request) MOBY systems supported I/E/F/V I/E/F Connectable SLGs Multiplex 2 x SLG Parallel 2 x SLG Software functions Programming SIMATIC user: With FC/FB Other users: Telegram description as per appendix of FC description Function block SIMATIC S7 FC 47 FC 45 SIMATIC S5 FB 47 - MDS addressing Direct access via addresses Commands Initialize MDS, read data from MDS, write data to MDS Dialog MOBY I: Normal station/VMDS Yes/Yes PROFIBUS diagnosis Yes. Can be parameterized via RESET. S7 diagnosis No Yes. Can be called via S7 OM. Firmware reloadable No Yes. Via S7 OM. Yes/No Power supply1 Nominal value 24 V DC Permissible range 20 V to 30 V DC 20.4 V to 28.8 V DC S Without SLG at 50 mA 350 mA S With SLG connected Max. of 600 mA with one SLG Max. of 300 mA per SLG when two SLGs are connected Max. of 500 mA per connected SLG Current consumption U = 24 V DC, max. 6-38 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Interfaces Table 6-13 Technical data of ASM 470/475 ASM Type Power loss of the module, typical ASM 470 ASM 475 1W 2W Current consumption from P-bus, max. 100 mA 80 mA Galvanic isolation between S7-300 and MOBY Depends (100 k between S7-300 and 24 V DC) Yes. Use for ungrounded operation of a separate power pack for the ASM. Fuse, 24 V to SLG Yes. Electronic. Yes. Electronic. Ambient temperature During operation S SIMATIC horizontal 0 C to +60 C S SIMATIC vertical 0 C to +40 C During transportation and storage -40 C to +70 C Dimensions in mm (W x H x D) 40 x 125 x 120 Weight, approx. 0.2 kg 1 With MOBY F, the SLG voltage supply cannot be connected via the ASM. MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 6-39 Interfaces Wiring The ASM 470/475 is commissioned with the following steps. S Mount module S Mount module on the S7-300 mounting rail. See S7-300 manual. Note The CPU of the S7-300 must be switched to STOP status before the module is mounted. ! Warning The S7-300 may only be wired when the voltage is off. Note To ensure interference-free operation of the ASM 475, make sure that ASM and SIMATIC CPU (or ASM and IM 153 with ET 200M) are run on the same voltage. Non-adherence may cause possible error messages on the CPU not to be cleared when the ASM is turned on. 6-40 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Interfaces Front panel The following figure shows the front plate of the ASM 470/475 and the inside of the front door with the related connection diagram. The SLGs must be connected to the ASM as shown in the connection diagram. MOBY MOBY ASM470 SF ASM475 SF DC5 V 24 V ANW ERR_1 S+ Error PRE_1 S- SLG 1 RxD_1 E+ RxD E- ERR_2 SLG 2 PRE_2 RxD RxD_2 6GT2 002-0FA10 6GT2 002-0GA10 Status and error indicators Figure 6-33 E+ E- SLG 2 S+ S- ACT_2 Error SLG 1 ACT_1 Active Connection diagram The numbers for the connection are based on plug connector X1 located on the upper part of the housing. Front plate and inside of the front door of the ASM 470/475 Note The power supply for MOBY F cannot be obtained from the ASM. MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 6-41 Interfaces Indicator elements on ASM Table 6-14 Function of the LEDs on ASM 470/475 ASM 475 ASM 470 Meaning SF SF System fault (hardware error on ASM) 24 V DC 5 V 24 V are connected to ASM. 5 V voltage on ASM is okay. Active ACT_1, ACT_2 The appropriate SLG is processing a user command. Error ERR_1, ERR_2 The flashing pattern shows the last error. This indicator can be reset with the option_1 parameter. ANW PRE_1, PRE_2 Indicates the presence of an MDS RxD RxD_1, RxD_2 Indicates communication to the SLG. Interference on SLG can also cause this LED to light up. SLG 1, SLG 2 - Indicates the SLG which was selected by the user command. Only one LED may light up at a time (multiplex operation). Additional operational states are indicated on the ASM 475 on the LEDs PRE, ERR, and SF. Table 6-15 SF Additional LEDs on the ASM 475 PRE_1 ERR_1 PRE_2 ERR_2 Description, Causes, Remedy ON OFF/ON ON (perm.) OFF/ON ON (perm.) Hardware is defective (RAM, flash, ...) ON OFF ON OFF OFF Loader is defective (can only be fixed at the plant). OFF 2 Hz OFF 2 Hz OFF Firmware is being loaded or no firmware detected. Load firmware. Do not turn off ASM. OFF 2 Hz 2 Hz 2 Hz 2 Hz Firmware loading terminated with error New start required. Load firmware again. Check update files. Any 5 Hz 5 Hz 5 Hz 5 Hz Operating system error Turn ASM on/off. OFF OFF 1 x flash every 2 sec OFF 1 x flash every 2 sec ASM has booted and is waiting for a RESET (init_run) from the user. 6-42 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Interfaces Wiring to the SLG The figure below shows a connection cable between ASM and SLG. The colors apply to the standard MOBY cable for the ASM 470. See chapter 3.7.3. Front plug connector of ASM (6ES7 392-1AJ00-0AA0) Cable with core sleeves SLG plug connector (socket) White 4 (12) Brown 5 (13) Green 6 (14) Yellow 7 (15) Pink 8 (16) Grey 9 (17) 6 1 4 5 2 3 (Shield) Cable shield bared Figure 6-34 Wiring of ASM 470/475 to SLG (6GT2 091-0E...) Shield connection See chapter 3.6 or figure 6-32. Lightning protection Implement the lightning protection and grounding measures required for your application. Lightning protection measures always require individual consideration of the entire system. Customer cable fabricating To ensure EMC, the SLG cable must be led over an S7-300 shield connecting element (see figure 3-30). When customers make their own cables, the shield of the SLG cable must be bared as shown in figure 6-35. 30 Figure 6-35 170 Specifications in mm Baring of the cable shield when customer makes own cable MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 6-43 Interfaces Configuration of ASM for SIMATIC S7 under STEP 7 Note Installation of MOBY requires functional STEP 7 software on the PC/PG. Installation and configuration of the ASM 470/475 in the SIMATIC is handled by an installation program. The installation program is included with the "MOBY software" product (6GT2 080-2AA10). Installation The "Software MOBY" CD contains the installation files in subdirectory S7_om. Installation is almost completely automatic when Setup.exe is called. The specified steps during SETUP must be responded to. Note Remember that you will have to execute a separate Setup for installation of ASM 470 and ASM 475. The ASM 470/475 module is located in the hardware catalog of HWCONFIG under the following subdirectory for hardware configuration of the SIMATIC S7. SIMATIC 300 SM 300 Special 300 MOBY ASM470 MOBY ASM475 MOBY ASM475 PARAM Figure 6-36 6-44 ASM 470/475 directory in the hardware catalog MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Interfaces FC 45/47 with sample project You can use the file-dearchivation function of the SIMATIC Manager to load the FC with a sample project from the applicable subdirectory of the "Software MOBY" CD. Afterwards, the sample project is located in the directory S7PROJ of the SIMATIC Manager. ASM Type Directory in "Software MOBY" Project Name in SIMATIC Manager Path Name in SIMATIC Manager ASM 470 FC47 ASM470_CPU416 ASM470_C ASM 475 FC45 MOBY FC45 Moby_f_1 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 6-45 Interfaces 6.6 ASM 473 Application area The ASM 473 interface is a MOBY module for the SIMATIC S7. It can be installed in the ET 200X and DESINA distributed I/O device. The interface of the ET 200X to the user is PROFIBUS DPV1. An S7-300 or S7-400 with integrated PROFIBUS connection can be used as the controller. The ASM 473 supplements the SIMATIC S7 MOBY interface modules ASM 470 and ASM 475. Its protection rating of IP 67 permits it to be set up and operated directly in the process without additional protection. An ET 200X basic module (BM 141/142) with order number 6ES7 141-1BF11-0XB0 or 6ES7 142-1BD21-0XB0 is a prerequisite for use of the ASM 473. Currently, the ASM 473 cannot be used with the preconditioning basic module BM 147/CPU. The MDS data are accessed by physically addressing the MDS. The FC 45 function is available for use in a SIMATIC S7. The hardware configuration of the ASM 473 is performed with an Object Manager which is integrated in the SIMATIC Manager. Other features: S Up to 7 ASM 473s can be operated in one ET 200X station. S All I/O modules from the ET 200X family can be run parallel to the ASM 473. Figure 6-37 6-46 ASM 473 interface MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Interfaces Ordering data Table 6-16 Ordering data of ASM 473 ASM 473 interface module 6GT2 002-0HA00 Accessories: SLG cable (length 2 m = standard cable) Length: 5m 20 m for other lengths, see chapter 3.7.4 6GT2 491-1CH20 6GT2 491-1CH50 6GT2 491-1CN20 Opt. ASM connection plug without SLG cable (for cable lengths > 20 m) 6GT2 090-0BC00 Software MOBY 1 with FC 45 incl. documentation 6GT2 080-2AA10 Description of FC 45 German English French 1 Technical data Electronically available on "Software MOBY" CD See chapter 7.1. Table 6-17 Technical data of ASM 473 Interface to ET 200X SIMATIC S7 P-bus Cyclic and non-cyclic services Communication 2 words (cyclic)/ 238 bytes (non-cyclic) Command buffer in ASM 142 x 238 bytes Serial interface to SLG Plug connector 2 x coupling plug, M12 Line length, max. 20 m 2 m = standard length Other fabricatable cables = 5 m, 20 m (up to 1000 m on request) Connectable SLGs 1 x SLG 8x Software functions Programming Depends on PROFIBUS DP master SIMATIC S7 function block FC 45 MDS addressing Direct access via addresses Commands Initialize MDS, read data from MDS, write data to MDS PROFIBUS diagnosis Yes; ET 200X basic station. S7 diagnosis Yes. Can be called via S7 OM. Reloadable firmware Yes. Via S7 OM. MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 6-47 Interfaces Table 6-17 Technical data of ASM 473 Power supply1 Nominal value 24 V DC Permissible range 20.4 V to 28.8 V DC Current consumption S From encoder voltage 75 mA, typical Power loss of module 1.6 W, typical Digital inputs Via expansion modules from ET 200X family Digital outputs Via expansion modules from ET 200X family Ambient temperature During operation 0 C to +55 C During transportation and storage -40 C to +70 C Dimensions (W x H x D) in mm Dimensions of single devices 87 x 110 x 55 Dimensions of scale 60 x 110 x 55 Mounting 2 M5 screws (customer) 2 M3 screws (device) Protection rating IP67 Weight 0.275 kg 1 With MOBY F, the SLG power supply cannot be obtained from the ASM. For setup guidelines and other general technical data, see the ET 200X manual (order no. 6ES7 198-8FA01-8AA0). 6-48 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Interfaces Configuration PROFIBUS DP master module (e.g., S7-400 CPU) (Connection of other master is under preparation.) PROFIBUS cable to all PROFIBUS slaves 2 m (standard cable length) 24V Basis model: BM 141 BM 142 BM 143 BM 147 24 V for ET 200X electronics and MOBY-SLG Figure 6-38 SLG MDS SIEMENS MOBY F Configurator for an ASM 473 Note In contrast to ASM 45x (see figure 6-22), the 24 V power must be provided on the PROFIBUS plug and the load voltage plug. For details, see ET 200X manual. MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 6-49 Interfaces Basis module - prerequisites for operation of the ASM 473 The following table shows the status of the ET 200X modules as of 06/2002. The functionality of newer basis modules is stored in HW-Config of SIMATIC Manager. Table 6-18 Prerequsites for operation of the ASM 473 To Operate with ASM 473 (6GT2 002-0HA00) To Operate with ASM 473 PARAM (6GT2 002-0HA10) 6ES7 141-1BF00-0XB0 No No 6ES7 141-1BF00-0AB0 Yes Yes 6ES7 141-1BF01-0XB0 No No 6ES7 141-1BF10-0XB0 No No 6ES7 141-1BF11-0XB0 Yes Yes 6ES7 141-1BF40-0AB0 Yes Yes 6ES7 142-1BD10-0XB0 No No 6ES7 142-1BD11-0XB0 No No 6ES7 142-1BD20-0XB0 No No 6ES7 142-1BD21-0XB0 Yes Yes 6ES7 143-1BF00-0AB0 Yes Yes 6ES7 143-1BF00-0XB0 Yes Yes 6ES7 147-1AA00-0XB0 No No 6ES7 147-1AA01-0XB0 No Yes Order Number of the ET 200X Basis Module 6-50 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Interfaces Up to 7 ASM 473s can be operated in one ET 200X. 24V 24V SLG SLG ... 24V SLG SLG SIEMENS SIEMENS SIEMENS SIEMENS MOBY F MOBY F MOBY F MOBY F MDS MDS MDS Figure 6-39 24V MDS ... Maximum configuration of ASM 473 on an ET 200X Depending on the PROFIBUS master, up to 123 ET 200X modules can be run on one PROFIBUS branch. Hardware configuration The ASM 473 is integrated in the hardware configuration of SIMATIC Manager by calling Setup.exe in the directory daten/S7_OM on the "Software MOBY" CD. Currently, the ASM 473 cannot be integrated in other masters. SLG connection An SLG always occupies the two M12 connection sockets (X3 and X 4) on the ASM 473. A prefabricated cable (cf. figure 6-24 or chapter 3.7) ensures easy connection of the SLG. The standard version of this cable is 2 m in length. Other lengths are available on request. An SLG connection plug with screw terminals (see figure 6-23) is available for users who want to make their own cable. Cable and SLG connection plug can be ordered from the MOBY catalog. MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 6-51 Interfaces Pin assignment The following figure shows the pin assignment to the SLG and the indicator elements. Socket Pin assignment (SLG) X3 1 2 3 4 5 +RxD +TxD -TxD -RxD PE X4 1 2 3 4 5 +24 V n. c. 0V n. c. PE LEDs for PROFIBUS DP General operational indicators (SF, BF, ON, DC24 V) are located on the basic module of the ET 200X. LEDs for MOBY RxD: SLG is busy with a command. PRE: Indicates the presence of an MDS ERR: Flashing pattern (see appendix B.1) indicates error. Additional operational states of the ASM are indicated on the LEDs PRE and ERR. PRE ERR Description, Causes, Remedy OFF/ON ON (perm.) Hardware is defective (RAM, flash, ...). ON OFF Loader is defective (can only be repaired at the plant). 2 Hz OFF Firmware is being loaded or no firmware detected. Load firmware. Do not turn off ASM. 2 Hz 2 Hz Firmware loading terminated with error New start required. Load firmware again. Check update files. 5 Hz 5 Hz Operating system error Turn ASM or ET 200X basis station off/on. OFF 1 x flash ASM booted and is waiting for a RESET (init_run) every 2 sec from the user. Figure 6-40 Pin asssignment and LEDs of ASM 473 Note With the MOBY F, the SLG power cannot be connected via the ASM. 6-52 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Interfaces The figure below shows the dimensions for the positions of the holes for the screws. This information applies to a basic module and an expansion module (ASM 473). 120 126.8 BM 141/142 n 60 87 110 53.5 28.25 Dimensions for the mounting holes For M5 mounting screw ASM 473 n = number of expansion modules Figure 6-41 Dimensions for mounting holes for basic and expansion modules. MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 6-53 Interfaces 6.7 ASM 824/850/854 Application area The ASM 824/850/854 interfaces are designed for distributed installation in warehousing, logistical and distribution applications. The functional, robust housing fits anywhere. Up to four read/write antennas can be connected and run parallel to each other. This ensures dynamic operation of MDS and SLA. The read/write antennas (SLA 81) and stub lines must be ordered separately. The MOBY wide-range power pack (6GT2 494-0AA00) can be used. The user has a choice of two interfaces. S PROFIBUS DPV1 (ASM 850, ASM 854) S RS 232: serial interface to PC and PC-compatible controllers (e.g., SICOMP, ASM 824) Figure 6-42 ASM 824/850/854 interface module ASM 824 Data on the MDS are accessed with the ASM 824 directly with physical addresses. The ASM 824 can be operated in parallel with up to four SLA 81s. Communication to the user is handled by a serial RS 232/422 interface with the 3964R protocol. This provides an easy way to connect PCs and other controllers to the MOBY F identification system. A C library (MOBY API) is available to users for their application. ASM 850 The ASM 850 accesses the data on the MDS directly via physical addresses. The ASM 850 is a low-cost solution for the connection of one SLA 81. Communication to the user is handled by the non-cyclic protocol service of PROFIBUS DPV1. Function FC 45 is available to SIMATIC S7-300/400 users for simple integration. 6-54 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Interfaces ASM 854 The ASM 854 accesses the data on the MDS directly with physical addresses. Communication to the user is handled by the non-cyclic protocol service of PROFIBUS DPV1. Function FC 45 is available to SIMATIC S7-300/400 users for simple integration. The ASM 854 can be operated in parallel with up to four SLA 81s. The description of the PROFIBUS DPV1 implementation is available to programmers of other controllers (see appendix of FC 45 description). Ordering data Table 6-19 Ordering data of the ASM 824/850/854 ASM 824 interfaces with RS 232/RS 422 serial interface. 3964R procedure for PC, SICOMP and other controllers. For four SLA 81s. 6GT2 402-2CE00 ASM 850 interfaces for operation of MOBY F components via PROFIBUS DPV1, without filehandler. For one SLA 81. 6GT2 402-2EA00 ASM 854 interfaces for operation of MOBY F components via PROFIBUS DP and DPV1 (PROFIBUS DP only for MDS 1xx (r/o)). Without filehandler. For four SLA 81s. 6GT2 402-2BB00 Accessories: 6GT2 401-2BB00 Read/write antenna, SLA 81 Standard connection cable between SLA 81 ASM 824/850/854. Length: 5 m 6GT2 391-1AH50 Extension for antenna cable 6GT2 391-1AH50. Length: 10 m 6GT2 391-1BN10 25 m 6GT2 391-1BN25 Mounting clamp for SLA 81 3SX6 284 Wide-range power pack, 100 to 230 V AC/ 24 V DC. 2.2 A (without 24 V cable). 6GT2 494-0AA00 24 V DC stub line for wide-range power pack, 6GT2 494-0AA00. Length: 5 m 6GT2 491-1HH50 RS 232 stub line between PC and ASM 824. Can be fabricated up to 32 m. For lengths see chapter 3.7.4. 6GT2 391-0B... Plug connector for voltage supply (socket) for ASM 824/850/854 6GT2 390-1AB00 PROFIBUS plug connector 9-pole, submin. D plug connector for 2 stub lines 6ES7 972-0BA11-0XA0 (For other plug connectors, see catalog ST 70 or IK PI.) MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 6-55 Interfaces Table 6-19 Ordering data of the ASM 824/850/854 Adapter floor plate for top hat rail mounting for ASM 824/850/854 6GT2 390-0BA00 C library for ASM 824 (MOBY API) Included on "Software MOBY" CD (see chap. 7.1) FC 45 for ASM 850 and ASM 854 Included on "Software MOBY" CD (see chap. 7.1) Description of FC 45 For programming ASM 850/854 German English French Electronically available on "Software MOBY" CD Description MOBY API (C-Lib for ASM 850/854) German English Electronically available on "Software MOBY" CD 6GT2 494-0AA00 PROFIBUS master 24 V DC S7-300 (FC 45) 230 V AC PROFIBUS DPV1 S7-400 (FC 45) Other master (external FC) MOBY power pack or other 24 V connection 6GT2 491-1HH50 ASM_channel: 1 2 3 4 6GT2 391-1AH50 Figure 6-43 6-56 SLA SLA SLA SLA MDS MDS MDS MDS MOBY F SLA 8x and MDS Fxxx Configurator for ASM 824, ASM 850 (only with 1 x SLA 8x) and ASM 854 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Interfaces Technical data Table 6-20 Technical data of the ASM 824/850/854 ASM 850 ASM 854 ASM 824 Serial interface to user PROFIBUS DPV1 RS 232/RS 422 Max. cable length See PROFIBUS configuration. 30/500 m Procedure/protocol EN 50170, vol. 2, PROFIBUS 3964R Connection 9-pole, submin D socket (screw lock) Transmission speed 9600 baud to 12 Mbaud (automatic recognition) 38.4 kbaud Max. block length 4 words (cyclic)/238 bytes (non cyclic) 238 bytes Serial interface to SLA 9-pole, submin. D socket (screw lock) Max. cable length (ASM-SLA) Max. of 55 m SLAs which can be connected 1 x SLA 81 4 x SLA 81 4 x SLA 81 Software functions Programming Depends on PROFIBUS DPV1 master MOBY API: C library for PC with Windows 98/NT 4.0 Function block SIMATIC S7 FC 45 - MDS addressing Direct access via addresses Direct access via addresses Commands Initialize MDS. Read data from MDS. Write data to MDS. Dialog No Initialize MDS. Read data from MDS. Write data to MDS. No Digital inputs None Digital outputs None Voltage supply Connection plug 4-pole, M12 round plug connector (pin), not included with the ASM Nominal value 24 V DC Permissible range 20 to 30 V DC Current consumption 250 mA (without SLA) Max. switch-on current 1.1 A (without SLA) Ambient temperature During operation During transportation and storage -25 to +55 C ((no condensation)) -40 to +85 +85 C (no condensation) -40 Housing Dimensions (L x W x H) in mm 205 x 130 x 60 (without plug connector) Material Aluminum Color Anthracite MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 6-57 Interfaces Table 6-20 Technical data of the ASM 824/850/854 ASM 850 ASM 854 Mounting 4 M5 screws Optional: Top hat rail mounting Tightening moment (at room temperature) v 3 Nm Weight, approx. 1300 g Protection rating IP40 (higher ratings on request) Shock in acc. w. EN 60721-3-7/class 7M2 30 g Vibration in acc. w. EN 60721-3-7/class 7M2 1g 1.5 g MTBF (at +40 C) 1 105 hours Certification CE Pin allocations and switches RxD PRE ASM 824 (9 to 200 Hz) (200 to 500 Hz) ERR Plug connectors 1 to 4 to SLA Socket 1 2 3 4 Designation 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 + 6.6 V + Send + Receive CLK + - Receive - Send Ground (0 V) + 24 V CLK - Hous. Cable shield RxD: SLG active with command PRE: Presence indicates the presence of an MDS in the transmission window. ERR: ERR: Error indicated by flashing LED Figure 6-44 Serial interfaces of the ASM 824/850/854 to SLA 81 Only one SLA 81 can be connected to the ASM 850. 6-58 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Interfaces PROFIBUS SERIAL ON: (green) 24 V present on ASM SF/BF: (red) System fault/bus fault, RAM fault ASM 824: Flashes when turned on and stops when first real telegram is received. DC 24 V ACT: (green) SF/BF ON ACT This LED flashes once briefly when a command is finished. ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 24 V DC Pin Switches 1 to 7: PROFIBUS address Switch 1 ON: 20 Switch 2 ON: 21 2 1 3 4 1 : Switch 7 ON: 26 Example: PROFIBUS address = 84 (22 + 24 + 26) Ground + 24 V + 24 V Ground PROFIBUS 1 Socket Designation 1 2 3 4 5 6 Switch 8: Interface 2 ON: RS 422 OFF: RS 232 Switches 9 to 12: Free 1 2 3 4 Designation Not used Not used B line (red) Request to send (RTS) Ground, 5 V (M5) Potential, 5 V (floating: 60 mA) Not used A line (green) Not used Cable shield 7 8 9 Housing SERIAL 2 Socket 1 Only with ASM 850, ASM 854 2 Only with ASM 824 Figure 6-45 RS 232 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Not used TxD (send) RxD (receive) Not used Ground (0V) Not used Not used Not used Not used Housing Cable shield RS 422 Not used -TxD -RxD Not used Ground Not used Not used +TxD +RxD Cable shield Serial interface of ASM 824/850/854 to user MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 6-59 Interfaces Dimensions (in mm) 205 130 Grounding bolt, M4 Figure 6-46 Drawing of ASM 824/850/854 with mounting holes Adapter floor plate for top hat rail mounting Item 3 Quantity Floor plate 1 2 Profile section 1 3 Oval head screw (M5 x 10) 4 4 Washer (A5.3) 4 5 Countersunk screw (M4 x 10) 2 4 5 Designation 1 1 2 Figure 6-47 Drawing of adapter floor plate Note The profile section (item 2) can be turned by 90 and mounted on the floor plate to allow for adjustment to the actual situation. 6-60 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Interfaces 6.8 Serial Interface Module - SIM 6.8.1 Overview Application area The serial interface module (i.e., SIM) is the communication interface to almost all host computer systems, PCs, controllers of other manufacturers, and the mobile data memory (i.e., MDS). Layout and function The serial interface module (SIM) primarily contains the components of a read/write device (SLG - see chapter 5.2, field data, table 6-24). In addition, it is equipped with an expanded communications unit. This permits reliable transmission of data and commands from the host system to the SIM. AT-comp. PC RS 232 230V 24V SIM 80 ANT F5 SIEMENS MOBY F Figure 6-48 Example of a configuration for SIM MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 6-61 Interfaces Data structure of the MOBY F data memory MDS F4xx Table 6-21 The 2-kbit EEPROM of the transponder is divided into 16 blocks. Each block has 4 pages. One page is the smallest unit which can be accessed. One page consists of 4 8-bit bytes. Block access is only available for blocks 8 to 15. Page access is available for pages 1 to 63. The serial number and key A and key B cannot be read with ReadPage. Memory organization for SIM 80 ANT F5 with MDS F4xx Block Page Address in Memory Processing 1 Access 0 0 0 to 3 ro Public 1 4 to 7 r/w or ro 2 8 to 11 3 12 to 15 wo or 0 4 16 to 19 1 r/w / or 0 Description ID number (serial number, fixed code) Configuration Key A Key B Secret Protocol data 1B 5 20 to 23 Protocol data 0A 6 24 to 27 7 28 to 31 2-3 8 to 15 32 to 63 r/w or OTP Secret User data 4-7 16 to 31 64 to 127 r/w or OTP Secret or public Read/write memory can be used as desired for user data. This area can be configured with SIM ANT F5 (password assignment). 8-15 32 to 63 128 to 255 r/w Public Read/write memory can be used as desired for user data. This area cannot be configured. Protocol data 1A Protocol data 0B Areas (or settings) with light gray backgrounds can be specified by the OEM customer with the configuration page (page 1). Table 6-22 Memory organization for SIM 82 with MDS F4xx Block Page Address in Memory Processing 1 Access 0 0 0 to 3 ro Public ID number (serial number, fixed code) 4-7 16 to 31 64 to 127 r/w Public Read/write memory which can be used as desired for user data. 8-15 32 to 63 128 to 255 r/w Public Read/write memory which can be used as desired for user data (block access also possible starting at address 128). 1 Description ro Read only r/w Read/write wo Write only OTP One-time programmable memory 0 Read and write not permitted Memory is configured with the configuration page. 6-62 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Interfaces Memory locations marked as "secret" cannot be accessed until both sides have proven their identities. Encrypted data communication is used for this. Memory locations marked as "public" can be accessed without both sides proving their identities. Data are not encrypted. Block 0 contains the unique serial number (programmed during the production process), the configuration page (i.e., the configuration of the memory area) and the key. Block 1 contains the protocol data. Blocks 4 to 7 can be configured as secret or public areas, and blocks 2 to 7 can be used as read/write or read-only areas. In addition, you can modify key and protocol data to prevent access to these data. The configuration page itself can also be write-protected (i.e., it can be configured as a read-only area). Be extremely careful when programming the configuration page (you can only set up write protection once) for keys and protocol data since a mistake may cause you to lose access to the secret area of the transponder. Note Modification of the configuration page (page 1), keys and protocol data must take place in a defined environment. While programming is being performed, the transponder may not leave the communication field of the antenna! We recommend placing the transponder in the vicinity of the antenna (no space in between) and leaving it there during programming. Data areas which are marked as secret on the MDS F4xx can only be accessed in password mode. Access to a public page while in password mode is prevented with an error message. The mode is then automatically reset to crypto. Password mode must be re-activated before protected pages can be accessed again. Writing the configuration with WritePage() to an MDS F4xx data memory may cause the entire data carrier to be lost. If the antenna malfunctions while the data carrier is being written, the page (4 bytes) on the data carrier is set to "FF" (FORMAT in EPROM), and the data write procedure is no longer performed. Several bits are then set to 1. The data carrier can now only be recognized with GetSnr(). All other accesses create an error. If an error occurs during communication, the particular data memory is no longer selected. The data carrier must be selected again with GetSnr() and SelectLast(). MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 6-63 Interfaces Collision protection There is no collision protection. More than one MDS will cause an error message. They either won't be read or they will cause a mixture of data from both MDSs. Operating mode The MDS F4xx is run in standard protocol mode. This mode is specified by user command and not in the configuration page. The standard protocol mode is activated with the GetSnr command. Compatibility Since the MDS F4xx is compatible with the HITAG system, these MDSs can always be processed with the read head of the hand-held terminal. Configuration The configuration page has 4 configuration bytes. The first two bytes are used for the configuration while the other two bytes can be used as desired. Configuration bytes 0 and 1 The bits in configuration bytes 0 and 1 are used to configure the memory. This is how you define which area is to be public or private, read/write, readonly or no read/write accesses at all. You can assign the configuration page and write-access it until it is inhibited (bit 4 of configuration byte 1 is set to 0). After this byte has been write-protected once (i.e., specified as a read-only area), you can never change the configuration of the transponder memory again. 6-64 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Interfaces 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Block 7: Block 6: Block 5: "1" = r/w "0" = ro Block 4: Block 3: Block 2: Key A and B: "1" = "0" = wo Access to key is not possible. Protocol data in block 1: "1" = "0" = r/w Access to protocol data is not possible. Abbreviations used r/w Read and write operations are permitted. ro Only read operations are permitted. wo Only write operations are permitted. Figure 6-49 Configuration byte 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Access type for blocks 4 to 7: "0" = secret "1" = public Reserved OEM inhibit bit: "0" = "1" = Configuration page is ro. Configuration page is r/w. Reserved Abbreviations used r/w Read and write operations are permitted. ro Only read operations are permitted. Figure 6-50 Configuration byte 1 Note When you write a new value to configuration byte 1, do not change the bit positions marked as reserved. To meet this requirement, read the current value from configuration byte 1 and indicate the new values for the bit positions which you want to change. MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 6-65 Interfaces Configuration bytes 2 and 3 These two bytes are also write-protected by the OEM inhibit bit (configuration byte 1/bit 4 = 0). Except for this, you can use these two bytes as desired. They have no effect on the memory configuration. For instance, OEM customers can store their own OEM serial numbers there. Configuration of delivered MDS F4xx devices MDS F4xx transponders are configured by Siemens with the following default configuration. Table 6-23 Configuration of the delivered MDS F4xx transponders Page MDS Address, Type Value Configurability Unique serial number 0 Serial number Write-protected Permanently set Configuration byte 0 1 Protocol data `1' = r/w Can be changed. Keys A/B `1' = wo Can be changed. Blocks 2 to 7 `1' = r/w Can be changed. OEM inhibit bit `1' = Conf. page is r/w. Can be changed. Configuration byte 1 1 Blocks 4 to 7 Value for transport key, transport protocol data `1' = public 2 Key A 00 00 00 00 3 Key B 00 00 00 00 Can be changed. Can be changed, but not with the handheld terminal read head. Personalization The MDS F4xx can only be personalized with the SIM 80 ANT F5 (not with the hand-held terminal read head). Data structure of the MOBY F data memory MDS F1xx The unique 40-bit serial number of the transponder and 24 bits for the header and parity are stored in the 64-bit memory. The data are write-protected and cannot be changed. Since the MDS F1xx is compatible with data memory EM 4002, these data memories can also be read with the read head of the hand-held terminal. 6-66 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Interfaces Field data of MDS and SIM The following table shows the field data of all MOBY F components of the MDS and SIM. The information in the table makes it particularly easy to select the correct MDS and SIM. All technical data are typical data and are valid at an ambient temperature of 0 to +50 C, a supply voltage of 22 V to 27 V DC, and a metal-free environment. Tolerances of + 20% are permitted due to manufacturing and temperature factors. Additional tolerances apply to the field data when the total voltage range of 20 V to 30 V DC is utilized on the SIM and/or the total temperature range is utilized on the MDS and SIM. Table 6-24 Field data of all MDSs and SIMs without effects of metal MDS MDS F124 MDS F125 MDS F160 MDS F415 SIM Length of the transmission window in mm (L) SIM 80 ANT F5 280 280 230 280 SIM 82 70 70 40 70 Width of the transmission window in mm (W) SIM 80 ANT F5 110 110 92 110 SIM 82 30 30 16 30 Working distance in mm (Sa) SIM 80 ANT F5 0 to 240 0 to 380 0 to 140 0 to 300 SIM 82 0 to 65 0 to 110 0 to 60 0 to 90 Limit distance in mm (Sg) SIM 80 ANT F5 280 420 160 340 SIM 82 80 140 70 110 Note For effects of metal on the transmission window, see chapter 3.4.2. Table 6-25 Minimum distance from MDS to MDS SIM 80 with ANT F5 SIM 82 1 MDS F124 MDS F125 MDS F160 MDS F415 w1m w1m w1m w1m1 w 0.3 m w 0.4 m w 0.3 m w1m The minimum distance can be reduced for SIM 80 ANT F5 in multi-tag operation. The MDSs may be located next to each other, but overlapping is not permitted. MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 6-67 Interfaces Table 6-26 Minimum distance from antenna to antenna with MDS F4xx (r/w) SIM 80 with ANT F5 SIM 82 SIM 80 with ANT F5 w5m w2m SIM 82 w2m w 1.2 m Table 6-27 Minimum distance from antenna to antenna with MDS F1xx (r/o) SIM 80 with ANT F5 SIM 82 w 1.5 m w1m w1m w 0.4 m SIM 80 with ANT F5 SIM 82 Note The values listed in tables 6-26 and 6-27 must be adhered to. Non-adherence would affect the inductive fields. Data transmission time would increase to an unknown value, or a command would be terminated with errors. A test is recommended in critical applications. 6.8.2 Cable and Plug Connector Allocation The 9-pole subminiature D plug connector (pin on device side) is used for the following purposes. S Connection to the PC/computer S Connection of the input and output Plug connector on SIM 80 ANT F5 Table 6-28 Plug connector allocation of the 9-pole submin D (pin housing side) Designation RS 232 Pin 9-pole submin D plug connector with screwtype lock 1 2 ! 6-68 1 Cable shield 2 TxD (Send) 3 RxD (Receive) 4 Digital input2 5 Ground (0V) 6 Not used 7 Not used 8 Cable shield 9 Digital output (24 V DC, max. 0.5 A ohmic load) 1 Logical "0": < 2 V on 50 / logical "1": 22 V on 50 Logical "0": - 2 V < log 0 < 0.8 V / logical "1": 3 V < log 1 < 30 V Caution If metallized sub D housings are used on the SIM side, the housing must be connected to the cable shield. MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Interfaces Table 6-29 "SERIAL" plug connector on SIM 82 Plug connector allocation of the 9-pole submin D (socket housing side) Designation Socket RS 232 9-pole submin D plug connector with screwtype lock 1 Not used Not used 2 TxD (send) D- (send) 3 RxD (receive) E- (receive) 4 Not used Not used 5 Ground (0 V) Ground (0 V) 6 Not used Not used 7 Not used Not used 8 Not used D+ (send) 9 Not used E+ (receive) Cable shield Cable shield Housing Plug connector allocation of the 9-pole submin D1 (socket housing side) Table 6-30 Plug connector on SIM 82 Designation Socket 9-pole submin D plug connector with screwtype lock 1 +6.6 Volt 2 + Send 3 + Receive 4 CLK + 5 - Receive 6 - Send 7 Ground (0 V) 8 +24 Volt 9 CLK - Housing 1 RS 422 Cable shield This plug connector allocation is valid for SIM 82 <=> SLA 81. MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 6-69 Interfaces SLA 81 Plug connector allocation of SLA plug connector1 (pin housing side) Table 6-31 Plug connector on SLA 81 4 3 5 8 6 7 2 1 View of top 1 Voltage supply plug connector on SIM 80/82 4 3 1 2 View of top 6-70 Designation Pin 1 +6.6 Volt 2 + Send 3 + Receive 4 CLK + 5 - Receive 6 - Send 7 CLK - 8 Ground (0 V) This plug connector allocation is valid for SLA 81 <=> SIM 82. Table 6-32 Plug connector allocation of 4-pole voltage supply plug connector (pin housing side) Designation Pin 1 Ground (0 V) 2 + 24 V 3 + 24 V 4 Ground (0 V) MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Interfaces Voltage supply - SIM The voltage supply of the SIM is provided by a 4-pole plug connector. It is essential to consider the voltage drop on the supply cable. The permissible length of the voltage supply cable depends on the current consumption of the SIM and on the ohmic resistance of the connection cable. Table 6-33 Voltage supply of the SIM SIM 80 ANT F5 SIM 82 Nominal value 24 V DC 24 V DC Permissible range 20 to 30 V (as measured on the plug connector of the SIM) 20 to 30 V (as measured on the plug connector of the SIM) 1.5 A 0.6 A (without DO) 1.1 A (with DO) 1.1 A 0.25 A - Current consumption Startup current At 24 V Table 6-34 Max. ripple of the supply voltage for SIM 80 ANT F5 (based on frequency range) fripple (kHz) Uripple max. (mV RMS) fripple t 0.5 48 0,5 v fripple t 20 7 20 v fripple t 120 36 120 v fripple t 130 12 fripple u 130 48 Note For SIM 80 ANT F5 When a switching power pack is used, make sure that the switching frequency is in the range of 160 kHz < fswitch < 200 kHz. MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 6-71 Interfaces Standard cabling for SIM 80 ANT F5 with the RS 232 interface SIM 1 RxD TxD TxD RxD Pin 1 1 Computer Cable length max. of 30 m Pin 1 Caution: If metallized sub D housings are used on the SIM side, the housing must be connected to the cable shield. Figure 6-51 Standard cabling for computer/SIM 80 ANT F5, RS 232 Standard cabling for SIM 82 with RS 232 interface SIM 1 Computer RxD TxD RxD TxD Pin 1 1 Cable length (max. of 30 m) Pin 1 Caution: If metallized sub D housings are used on the SIM side, the housing must be connected to the cable shield. Figure 6-52 Standard cabling for computer/SIM 82, RS 232 The SIM is equipped with a standard RS 232 (V.24) interface with the signal lines on pins 2 and 3. V.24 controller lines (e.g., DSR, DTR, RTS and CTS) are not supported by SIM. Acknowledgment of the data is performed at the procedure level. 6-72 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Interfaces Standard cabling for SIM 82 with RS 422 interface SIM Computer Cable length (max. of 1000 m) 1) TxD E- E+ D- RxD D+ Pin 1 1) Apply shield to plug connector housing. Figure 6-53 Standard cabling for computer/SIM 82, RS 422 DI/DO cabling for SIM 80 ANT F5 with voltage supply SIM 1 DO Imax = 0.5 A DI 230 V AC Pin 1 1 4 3 1 2 24 V DC - + Max. cable length: 100 m (shielded or unshielded) Caution: If metallized sub D housings are used on the SIM side, the housing must be connected to the cable shield. Figure 6-54 DI/DO cabling with voltage supply for SIM 80 ANT F5 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 6-73 Interfaces 6.8.3 Programming the SIM Module Communication on the serial interface between the SIM and the host computer system is handled by the ASCII protocol. The telegrams are protected with a BCC (i.e., Block Check Character). For a description of the protocol, see the applicable programming guide. A C library (MFWAPI for Windows 95/NT 4.0) and programming guide (see chap. 7.1) are available to the user for the computer. PC user The SIM is connected to a serial interface of the computer. Windows 95/NT 4.0 users use PC interface COM1 and/or COM2. Using additional hardware, 4 interfaces can be provided. Can be run on PC models starting with processor 80486 SX with serial interface and a Windows 95/ NT 4.0 operating system. For computers which do not use Windows (e.g., UNIX), see the communication specifications from the Windows 95/NT 4.0 programming guide. See appendix A for order number. What do I do if nothing works ? a) Check supply voltage with a measuring instrument directly on the SIM plug connector. b) Check the cabling to the computer. S Do SIM and computer have the same physical interface? S Is the polarity of the connection cable (RS 232 or RS 422) correct? RxD of SIM must be connected to TxD of computer, or vice versa. S Is the cable shield correctly installed? Error messages The error messages are described in the individual programming guides. Distance to SIM is too short When the distance to the SIM is too short, check the following. S Power pack/switching power pack (see chap. 3.5 for interference) S Are monitors or other sources of interference in the vicinity (see chap. 3.5)? S Is metal in the immediate vicinity (see chap. 3.4)? 6-74 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Interfaces 6.8.4 SIM 80 ANT F5 Application area The SIM 80 with ANT F5 meets the primary technical requirements of the SLG 80 with ANT F5. Use of an ASCII protocol for communication permits the use of computer systems, PCs and controllers of other manufacturers. In addition, the SIM 80 permits use of the expanded functions of the EEPROM-MDS (MDS F4xx) such as selective read and write-accesses to several MDSs in the transmission window (i.e., pileup recognition and multitag function). The EEPROM-MDS (MDS F4xx) also offers cryptographic and password functions for data protection. These functions can only be used in combination with the SIM 80. See appendix A of the programming guides. Ordering data Figure 6-55 SIM 80 ANT F5 serial interface module Table 6-35 Ordering data for the SIM 80 ANT F5 SIM 80 ANT F5 serial interface module (Counter plug for supply voltage is included.) 6GT2 405-0AF00 Stub lines and accessories See chapter 3.7. Software See chapter 7.1. Programming guide See appendix A. MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 6-75 Interfaces Technical data Table 6-36 Technical data of SIM 80 ANT F5 Inductive interface to MDS Max. read/write distances, SIM-MDS 420 mm (see field data) Transmission frequency 125 kHz Serial interface RS 232 Procedure ASCII protocol Data transmission speed 9600 baud Data line length (max.) 30 m Line length, antenna 1 2m (can be plugged in on SIM side) Software functions Read, write, initialize MDS, access rights and multi-tag. See programming guide. Programming Depends on computer, PC or PLC of other manufacturer C libraries available for PC MFWAPI (for Windows 95/ NT 4.0) Supply voltage (via separate power plug connector) 24 V DC, linear regulated power pack or clock-pulsed switching power pack (160 to 200 kHz) 20 to 30 V DC Nominal value Permissible range Current consumption at room temperature without DO Switchon current, brief Operation (at 24 V) Max. of 1.5 A 600 mA (typical) Digital inputs 1 Digital outputs 1 MTBF 1 x 105 hours Housing Dimensions (in mm) 6-76 For antennas (L x W x H) 350 x 350 x 20 For electronics w/o plug (L x W x H) 320 x 145 x 100 Color Antenna SLG housing Anthracite Anthracite Material Antenna SLG housing Aluminum Aluminum Plug connection (data) 9-pole submin plug connector (pin on device side) Plug connection (Supply voltage: counter plug is included with the SIM.) M12 4-pole device plug connector (IP65) MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Interfaces Table 6-36 Technical data of SIM 80 ANT F5 Protection rating in acc. w. EN 60529 IP652 Antenna IP65 Shock in acc. w. EN 60721-3-7, class 7M2 Total shock-response spectrum, type II 30 g Vibration in acc. w. EN 60721-3-7, class 7M2 1g 1.5 g Mounting of SIM 4 M6 screws Mounting of antenna Min. of 4 M6 screws Turning moment (at room temperature) v 3 Nm Ambient temperature During operation During transportation and storage -25 to +60 C -40 to +85 C Weight (SIM) Approx. 3600 g Weight (antenna) Approx. 1200 g 1 2 Field data SIM housing (9 to 200 Hz) (200 to 500 Hz) Note: The antenna is prefabricated. Any changes to the cable will cancel the warranty and the CE/BZT certification. IP65 with special plug 6GT2 490-1AA00 (see chap. 7.2) Table 6-37 Field data of SIM 80 ANT F5 Operating distance (Sa) 0 to 380 mm (See table 6-24.) Limit distance (Sg) 420 mm (See table 6-24.) Transmission window (L) 280 mm (See table 6-24.) Minimum distance from ANT F5 to ANT F5 (D) See figure 6-58. MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 6-77 Interfaces FCC information ! Warning Do not make changes on the devices. Violation will invalidate interference emission certification (FCC) and the manufacturer 's warranty. Note This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: S Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. S Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. S Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. S Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. ! 6-78 Caution Use of a shielded cable for any kind of connection cable is absolutely necessary. The cable shield must be secured with a shield clamp directly on the interface module and grounded via a grounding rail. MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Interfaces Transmission window OOOOOOO OOOOOOO OOOOOOO OOOOOOO OOOOOOO OOOOOOO OOOOOOO OOOOOOO OOOOOOO OOOOOOO OOOOOOO OOOOOOO MDS Transmission window View of side Sa Sg SIM 80 ANT F5 Metal plate (spacing kit) View of top L Figure 6-56 Transmission window of the SIM 80 ANT F5 Metal-free space Metal-free space with flush installation a = 100 mm Metal a a a a h = 100 mm (non-metallic spacer holder) Figure 6-57 Metal-free space for SIM 80 ANT F5 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 6-79 Interfaces Definition of distance D Da SIM 80 ANT F5 SIM 80 ANT F5 Db SIM 80 ANT F5 Figure 6-58 6-80 Da 1.5 m (for r/o) / 5 m (for r/w) Db 1.5 m (for r/o) / 5 m (for r/w) Distance D for SIM 80 ANT F5 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Interfaces Dimensions (in mm) Anti-kink cable protector, flexible in all directions Cable length 2m Minimum bending radius: 20 mm 7 10 12 7 290 320 280 1 140 125 145 A View A 280 350 100 20 40 25 52.5 Figure 6-59 Note The SIM must be grounded on the grounding screw1 provided. 25 Dimensional diagram of SIM 80 ANT F5 Spacer Kit for MOBY F ANT F5 See chap. 5.2. MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 6-81 Interfaces 6.8.5 SIM 82 Application area Ordering data Technical data The SIM 82 is a serial interface module in the medium-end performance range with a remote antenna. An ASCII protocol for communication permits use with computer systems, PCs and controllers of other manufacturers. The maximum cable length between antenna and evaluation unit is 55 m. The antenna head can be positioned very precisely for every application with the two screw nuts. The SIM 82 can be run on PC, SICOMP and controllers of other manufacturers. The connection cable from the antenna to the evaluation unit is included with the SIM 82 (length: 5 m). Figure 6-60 Serial interface module SIM 82 Table 6-38 Ordering data for SIM 82 SIM 82 serial interface module with serial interface RS 232/RS 422; ASCII protocol for PC, SICOMP and other controllers; with one SLA 81. 6GT2 405-2CB00 Stub lines and accessories See chapter 3.7. Programming guide See appendix A. Software See chapter 7.1. Table 6-39 Technical data of SIM 82 Inductive interface to the MDS 6-82 Read/write distances, SIM-MDS, max. 140 mm (see field data) Transmission frequency 125 kHz Serial interface to computer RS 232/RS 422 Procedure ASCII protocol Data transmission speed 9600 baud Data line length to computer, max. 30 m MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Interfaces Table 6-39 Technical data of SIM 82 Line length to antenna Software functions MDS addressing Commands Max. of 55 m (can be connected on both sides) Direct access via addresses Read, write, initialize MDS Special functions (e.g., access rights, multi-tag) are not available for the SIM 82. See programming guide. Programming Depends on computer, PC, PLC of other manufacturer The following C libraries are available for the PC MFWAPI (for Windows 95/NT 4.0) Dialog No Digital inputs Digital outputs None None Voltage supply Via separate power plug (not included with the SIM 82) Nominal value Permissible range 24 V DC 20 to 30 V DC Current consumption Switch-on current, brief Operation (with 24 V DC) Max. of 1.1 A 250 mA (typical) 1 x 105 hours MTBF (at +40 C) Housing Dimensions (in mm) Antenna with threading and plug ( x L) 65 x 90 Threading on plug side ( x incline x L) M30 x 1.5 x 40 Electronics without plug (L x W x H) 205 x 130 x 60 Color Antenna SIM housing Anthracite/pastel turquoise Anthracite Material Antenna SIM housing Krastin Aluminum Plug connection Data 9-pole, submin. D plug connector (socket on device side) Electronics antenna 9-pole, submin. D plug connector on SIM housing (socket) 8-pole M12 on antenna (pin) Voltage supply 4-pole M12 on SIM housing (pin) Protection rating in acc. w. EN 60529 SIM housing IP40 (higher ratings on request) Antenna IP65 Shock in acc. w. EN 60721-3-7/class 7M2 Total shock-response range, type II 30 g Vibration in acc. w. EN 60721-3-7/ class 7M2 1 g (9 to 200 Hz) 1.5 g (200 to 500 Hz) MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 6-83 Interfaces Table 6-39 Technical data of SIM 82 Mounting of SIM 4 M5 screws Tightening moment at 20 C v 3 Nm Mounting of antenna 2 plastic nuts, M30 x 1.5 Ambient temperature Antenna During operation During transportation and storage -25 C to +70 C -40 C to +85 C SIM housing During operation During transportation and storage -25 C to +55 C (no condensation) -40 C to +85 C (no condensation) Weight (without connection cable) 1300 g 150 g SIM Antenna Field data Table 6-40 Field data of SIM 82 Working distance (Sa) 0 to 110 mm Limit distance (Sg) 140 mm Diameter of transmission window (Ld) 70 mm Minimum distance from SLA to SLA (D) See figure 6-63. Transmission window Transmission window Ld Ld sa sg View of top View of side Figure 6-61 6-84 Transmission window of SIM 82 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Interfaces Metal-free space 20 20 40 IIIIIIIIIII IIIIIIIIIII IIIIIIIIIII IIIIIIIIIII IIIIIIIIIII IIIIIIIIIII IIIIIIIIIII IIIIIIIIIII IIIIIIIIIII IIIIIIIIIII IIIIIIIIIII MOBY F SLA 81 6GT2 401-2BB00 Metal-free space with flush installation View of top Note: Non-adherence to metal-free space will reduce limit and working distances. Figure 6-62 View of side Metal-free space for SIM 82 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 6-85 Interfaces Definition of distance D Da Db Da w 400 mm (for MDS F1xx) / w 1.2 m (for MDS F4xx) Db w 800 mm (for MDS F1xx) / w 2.4 m (for MDS F4xx) Figure 6-63 Pin allocations and switches RxD Distance D: SIM 82 PRE ERR Plug connector to SLA Socket 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Hous. Designation + 6.6 V + Send + Receive CLK + - Receive - Send Ground (0 V) + 24 V CLK - Cable shield RxD: SIM active with command PRE: Presence indicates the presence of an MDS in the transmission window (only valid when a command is queued). ERR: Error indicated by flashing LED Figure 6-64 6-86 Serial interface of SIM 82 to SLA 81 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Interfaces ON: 24 V present on (green) SIM SF/BF: System fault/ (red) bus fault, RAM fault SERIAL DC 24 V ACT: This LED goes on (green) while a command is being executed. SF/BF ON ACT ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 24 V DC 8 9 10 11 12 Pin Switches 1 to 7: Reserved Switch 8: Interface setting ON: RS 422 OFF: RS 232 Switch 9: MDS parameterization ON: MDS 1xx (r/o) OFF: MDS 4xx (r/w) Switch 10: Firmware download ON: Download OFF: Operation 2 1 3 4 1 2 3 4 Designation Ground + 24 V + 24 V Ground SERIAL Socket RS 232 RS 422 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Housing Not used TxD (send) RxD (receive) Not used Ground (0V) Not used Not used Not used Not used Cable shield Not used -TxD -RxD Not used Ground Not used Not used +TxD +RxD Cable shield Switch 11, 12: Not used Figure 6-65 Serial interface of SIM 82 to user MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 6-87 Interfaces Dimensions (in mm) 205 130 Grounding bolt, M4 Figure 6-66 Dimensional drawing of the SIM 82 housing 65 34 Antenna side 25 12 90 Mounting nuts 40 8-pole plug (M 12) Threading (M30 x 1.5) Figure 6-67 6-88 Dimensional drawing of antenna for SIM 82 (SLA 81) MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Interfaces Adapter floor plate for top hat rail mounting Item 3 Quantity 1 Floor plate 1 2 Profile section 1 3 Oval head screw (M5 x 10) 4 4 Washer (A5.3) 4 5 Countersunk screw (M4 x 10) 2 4 5 Designation 1 2 Figure 6-68 Drawing of mounting of adapter floor plate Note The profile section (item 2) can be turned by 90 and mounted to allow for adjustment to the actual situation. MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 6-89 Interfaces 6-90 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Accessories MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 7 7-1 Accessories 7.1 MOBY Software Starting with version 3.0, the "MOBY Software" product is delivered on a CD. All function blocks and drivers for MOBY are included. The "Les_mich" (i.e., read_me) file on CD gives a brief explanation of the programs listed below. S FB 240: Function block for ASM 450; MOBY on PROFIBUS DP with SIMATIC S5 (including master device file for PROFIBUS DP) S FB 250: Function block for ASM 400 S FB 41 contains a function block for the ASM 410. The call interface of this function block is almost identical to that of FB 250. See the description of FB 250 for programming. S FC 44 permits the ASM 450 to be used in a SIMATIC S7 environment. Be sure to read the "Read_me" file in the FC 44 directory carefully. See description of "FC 44 for ASM 450" for use of the ASM 450. S FC 45: S7 function for ASM 850, ASM 854 S Function FC 47 for ASM 470 S FB 47 contains a function block for the SIMATIC S5-115U to 155U. It permits the ASM 470 to be used in a SIMATIC S5 environment with an ET 200M. S Test and demonstrator programs for presenting the functions (e.g., "read from MDS", "write to MDS" and so on) on a PC (Windows). MOBY modules ASM or SIM are connected by a cable (serial interface) to the PC (i.e., COM1 or COM2). S Brief explanations of the individual directories in German or English. Cf. "les_mich.txt" or "read_me.txt". S 3964R driver for DOS, Windows 95 and Windows NT S C library (MFWAPI) for Windows 95/NT 4.0 (for SIM 82/SIM 80 ANT F5) S C library (MOBY API) for Windows 98/NT 4.0 (for ASM 824) S Latest version of MOBY documentation as PDF file S Tools. Helpful programs for the MOBY configuration 7-2 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Accessories Operator guide The "Software MOBY" CD contains a user-friendly operator guide based on HTML. After Start.exe is called, a screen appears with the following main items in the top menu line. S FC for S7 S FB for S5 S PC Support S Docu S Tools S Demo S News Note Information on MOBY software or licensing The purchase price of an interface module or SIM does not include software or documentation. The "Software MOBY" CD-ROM which includes all available FBs/FCs for SIMATIC, C libraries for Windows 98/NT, demo programs, and so on must be ordered separately. Furthermore, the CD-ROM contains the complete MOBY documentation (in German, English and French) in PDF format. The purchase price of an interface module or SIM includes the price for utilization of the software including documentation on the "Software MOBY" CD-ROM, and the purchaser is granted the right to make copies (copy license) to the extent required by the customer-specific application or development for the system. In addition, the enclosed contract covers the use of software products in return for a one-time payment. MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 7-3 Accessories C library, MFWAPI for SIM 80/82 The import library is written in C++. The following functions are supported. S Read MDS S Initialize MDS S Write MDS S Password protection and access rights (not SIM 82) S Multi-tag recognition (not SIM 82) C library, MOBY API for ASM 824 The import library is written in C++. The following functions are supported. S Read MDS S Initialize MDS S Write MDS Driver software is available for the 3964R protocol. The programming guide is included as a PDF file on the "Software MOBY" CD. Ordering data Table 7-1 Ordering data for MOBY software Order No. Software MOBY 7-4 6GT2 080-2AA10 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Accessories 7.2 MOBY Wide Range Power Pack Description Ordering data The MOBYR wide range power pack is a compact, primary-pulsed power supply. It is designed for use on single-phase, alternating current networks with two DC outputs (socket connector, circuited in parallel). Its robust physical characteristics include an aluminum housing which gives the finely-tuned system physical strength, protection against electromagnetic interference and optimum heat dissipation. A built-in power limitation circuit protects the primary-pulsed power supply against overload and short circuiting. The standard model has overvoltage protection (SIOV) which protects the connected electronics against excessive voltage. Figure 7-1 MOBY wide range power pack Table 7-2 Ordering data for MOBY wide range power pack Order No. Technical data MOBY wide range power pack, 100 to 230 V AC/24 V DC/2.2 A, incl. 2 counterplugs for the output voltage 6GT2 494-0AA00 24 V stub line for ASM 824/850/854, SLG 80/82, SIM 80/82; length: 5 m 6GT2 491-1HH50 Table 7-3 Technical data of MOBY wide range power pack NNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNN Input Input voltage Nominal value Range Frequency Input current Efficiency Power connection Power failure bypass Undervoltage switch-off Overvoltage protection MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 100 to 230 V AC 90 to 253 V AC 50/60 Hz 0.85 to 0.45 A w 80 % at full load 2 m power cable with protection contact plug w 10 msec Yes SIOV 7-5 Accessories Table 7-3 Technical data of MOBY wide range power pack Output Output nominal voltage Output nominal current Residual ripple Socket contacts 24 V DC 2.2 A 20 mVss Up to 160 kHz 50 mVss Over 160 kHz NTC Yes Startup current limitation Continuous short circuit proof Ambient conditions Ambient temperature During operation During transportation and storage Ventilation General specifications Dimensions of power supply incl. mounting plate, (L x W x H) in mm -20 C to +40 C (max. of +60 C, see notes on safety) -40 C to +80 C Convection Weight Color 205 x 80 x 60 (without connection plug) Approx. 1000 g Anthracite Elektromagnetic compatibility Interference emission (EN 50081-1) Interference immunity (EN 50082-2) Class B in acc. w. EN 55022 EN 61000-4-2 Safety Certifications Electrical safety check Galvanic isolation, primary/secondary Protection class Protection rating CE, GS EN 60950/VDE 0805 and VDE 106, part 1 4 kV AC I, in acc. w. EN 60950 (VDE 0805) IP65 in acc. w. EN 60529 (only when installed) Plug connector allocation of 24 V output Output 1 and 2 Socket 1: Ground (0 V) Figure 7-2 7-6 3 4 2 1 Socket 2: +24 V DC Socket 3: +24 V DC Socket 4: Ground (0 V) Plug connector allocation of 24 V output MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Accessories Dimensions (in mm) 7.5 65 80 3 57 205 176 7.5 Figure 7-3 5 5 190 Dimensions of the MOBY wide range power pack Notes on safety ! Caution Do not open the devices or modify them. Non-adherence will invalidate the CE seal and the manufacturer's warranty. When installing the power pack, it is essential to comply with the applicable DIN/VDE regulations or the regulations of your country. The application area of the power pack is restricted to "information technological, electrical office machine" covered by standard EN 60950/ VDE 0805. A device may only be commissioned and operated by qualified personnel. For the purposes of the safety notes in this product documentation, qualified personnel are those persons who are authorized to commission, ground and tag devices, systems and current circuits in accordance with safety standards. The device may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and technical description and only in connection with components and devices recommended and approved by Siemens. Correct operation of the product is dependent on correct storage, setup and mounting as well as careful use and maintenance. When mounting, make sure that the power outlet socket can be accessed easily. During operation, the housing may heat up up to +40 C. This is no cause for concern. However, remember that the power pack must be covered if the ambient temperature exceeds +40 C to prevent people from touching the hot housing. The power pack must be sufficiently ventilated even when covered. MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 7-7 Accessories 7.3 MOBY Hand-Held Terminal STG F Application area The STG F is a powerful, mobile, hand-held terminal for the MOBY F identification system. It is designed for applications in warehouses, logistics, distribution and service. The service and test device (STG F) is an indispensable aid for commissioning and testing. All MOBY F data memories can be inductively read and written. Figure 7-4 Layout and function MOBY STG F hand-held terminal The STG F mobile, hand-held terminal consists of a basic device (Basis PSION Workabout mx) and a compact, snap-on read/write head. It is equipped with a housing which is protected against splashed water (IP54), an LCD display with 240 x 100 pixels, an alphanumeric keyboard and various interfaces (for EEPROM card, charge battery, RS 232/TTL for MOBY F read head, battery charging interface incl. RS 232 for the PC coupling, and so on). The included MOBY software (memory card) provides the service and test functions for reading, writing, etc. all MOBY F data memories. S Read data from data memory S Write data to data memory (only r/w MDS F4xx) S Read and display ID number of data memory S Display and edit data in hexadecimal or ASCII format S Enable/disable password protection Using the optional C library as a basis, it is very easy to program your own applications (including a customized user interface) for reading/writing the data memories. Also available directly from PSION are various development tools for the PC and a wide selection of accessories. The device opens up new applications in the area of logistics and distribution (e.g., commissioning data can be recorded or edited offline with the hand-held terminal and forwarded later to the PC/computer). 7-8 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Accessories Optional components For additional information, see Internet under http://www.psion.com/indu strial/. S 3link adapter cable to PC for easy exchange of data between PC and PSION Workabout mx S Basic PSION Workabout mx device with large function keys and numeric keypad S Extra memory card with up to 8 Mbytes of memory S Docking station incl. high-speed charging device and software for easy data communication between PSION Workabout mx and PC System prerequisites The following prerequisites must be provided before the library for SIBO 'C' (SIBO 'C' is the C development environment for the PSION Workabout) can be used. S PC The "C development package for the PSION Workabout" must be installed on the PC. The development package must be obtained directly from PSION. (See: http://www.psion.com/industrial/) S Hand-held terminal PSION Workabout with wall holder and power pack. Use of the MOBY STG F hand-held terminal is recommended here. S PC cable You will need a 3link adapter cable (available from PSION) for the connection to the PC. See http://www.psion.com/industrial/. The cable is only required when it is not included in the C development package. S C library The following files are required: MOBY_F.H, MOBY_STG.LIB. They are included with the MOBY SIBO 'C' library from Siemens. Note Applications can naturally also be developed in the Basic programming language OVAL. However, the MOBY library cannot be used. MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 7-9 Accessories Hardware The following figure shows the primary hardware interfaces with which you can write your applications. TTL interface for operation of a MOBY read head RS 232 interface (e.g., connection of a MOBY F SIM) Graphic LCD display Control keys, contrast, display illumination, on/off, cursor keys Green LED: Goes on while the battery is being charged Extra flash memory card for storing large amounts of data Numeric input block with Enter key ASCII keypad, shift and special function keys (Ctrl, ) LIF interface for connection of PC, printer, etc. Figure 7-5 Hardware of the STG F If you are using a different type of PSION Workabout, other interfaces are available. Some examples are listed below. S Infrared interface S Numeric keyboard and function keys 7-10 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Accessories Ordering data Table 7-4 Ordering data of STG F STG F mobile, hand-held terminal Basic device (PSION Workaboutmx) with MOBY F read/write head, battery, standard software incl. STG functions on EEPROM card, operating instructions, without charging station 6GT2 403-0BA00 Charging station for a mobile hand-held terminal incl. plug-in power pack (230 V AC) 6GT2 303-1DA00 Accessories: MOBY F read/write head, 125 kHz without software and without description 6GT2 403-1BA00 6GT2 303-1CA00 Memory card with STG software and filehandler software for MOBY D/E/F/I/U incl. operator's guide Technical data C library for MOBY D/E/F/I/U for development of customer-specific screen dialogs, without development tools, incl. description 6GT2 381-1AB00 Replacement battery 6GT2 094-0AB00 or 2 AA batteries (NiCd, Ni-MH, alkali) Other PSION components (e.g., 3link cable, C development interface) Obtain from local dealer or PSION (See http://www.psion.com/ industrial/.) Table 7-5 Technical data for STG F hand-held terminal Hardware Processor NED V30mx 27.68 MHz ((80C86 compatible) p ) RAM 2 MB, approx. pp 1.8 MB of this can be used as desired ROM 2 MB for operating system User program 256 KB (with MOBY service and test program) Display Graphic LCD with 240 x 100 pixels, gray scales, backlighting can be enabled. enabled Keyboard Alphanumeric keypad with 57 keys Sound Piezo signal encoder Power supply NiCd battery back with 2 type AA batteries (850 mAh). High-speed charging, automatic switch-off 20 hours: read head inactive, display not lighted 4.5 hours: read head active, display not lighted 10 hours: read head inactive, display lighted Operating time Interfaces LIF interface (Low Insertion Force) for battery charging and communication with PC and printer (3link cable not included) RS 232 and TTL interfaces for connecting a MOBY read head Security Lock for battery and program memory MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 7-11 Accessories Table 7-5 Technical data for STG F hand-held terminal Software Operating system EPOC/16 multi-tasking, graphics support, GUI interface, Interpreter similar to MS-DOS File management MS-DOS compatible Integrated software MOBY service and test program, spreadsheet calculation, data base, pocket calculator, communication MOBY STG program Read, write, delete MDS. Read MDS ID. Save and load MDS data. Menu language: German or English. Data entered and displayed in ASCII or HEX. Technical data Complete device (incl. batteries) Read head Dimensions 260 x 90 x 35 [mm] [ ] 90 x 64 x 35 [mm] [ ] Weight Approx. 440 g Approx. 110 g Temperature Operation: Storage: Relative humidity 0% to 90%, no condensation Protection rating g IP54 (p (protected against g splashed p water)) Shock resistance Max. height of fall to concrete: 1 m EMC EN 55022 Electrostatic; RF; EFT IEC 801-2; 801 2; IEC 801-3; 801 3; IEC 801-4 801 4 -20 C to +60 C -25 25 C to +80 C (without battery) RF write/read head MOBY F Max. read/write di distances 7-12 125 kHz MDS type Distance in mm F124 F125 F160 F415 60 80 40 50 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Documentation A Starting 10.01.2004, the technical documentation of MOBY is only available electronically on the "Software MOBY" CD with the order number 6GT2 080-2AA10. Technical descriptions S Description ASM 400/401 (German/English) S Description ASM 410 (German/English) S Description ASM 450/FC 44 (German/English/French) S Description FC 45 (German/English/French) S Description ASM 470/FC 47 for SIMATIC S7 (German/English) S Description ASM470/FB 47 for SIMATIC S5 (German/English) S Description FB 250 for ASM 400/401 (German/English) S Description 3964 R for Windows 95/NT (German/English) S Description T3964R for DOS (German/English) S Description MOBY API (German/English) S Description C-library MFWAPI for Windows 95/NT 4.0 (German/English) Operator control guides S Operator control guide for STG MOBY hand-held terminal (English/ German) (also included with STG F) S Programming instructions for STG MOBY hand-held terminal (English/ German) MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 A-1 Documentation A-2 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 B Error Messages This chapter contains a list of MOBY I, E, F error messages. These messages are divided into two groups. B.1 Error numbers 01 hex to 1F hex are described in the first section. These messages are the same for all interfaces which use direct MDS addressing. B.2 Some function blocks (e.g., FB 250, FB 240 and FC 47) provide additional messages on the status of the hardware. These special messages are description in the second section. MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 B-1 Error Messages B.1 General Errors The following error codes can occur during MOBY F operation. They are transferred in the status byte during telegram communication or indicated on the red LED on the front panel. This LED indicates the last error (for most ASMs) even after it has already been corrected. For ASM 450, the error codes are also optionally reported via PROFIBUS as device-specific diagnoses. Table B-1 General errors Error Code in Hex LED Indication Cause/Remedy 00 00 No error, result is okay. 00 01 The ASM is not yet initialized to the SIMATIC. Send new start/RESET to ASM. 03 03 Error in connection to the SLG Supply voltage of ASM < 20 V or not connected 24 V voltage has voltage drops. use on the ASM has blown. Check wiring. Cable between ASM and SLG is wired incorrectly or cable break. Hardware defect: ASM or SLG Other SLG is active in the vicinity. Field interference 05 05 Unknown command code 06 06 The MDS reports address error. Check telegram. Read/write area of MDS requires password. Encryption or password for this area is wrong. Data comparison error Write-access not permitted (write-protected area) Read-access not permitted (read-protected area) FFT command with presence check Mode doesn't fit command (e.g., MOBY I with FFT command) Switch setting 4 (INIT) with read/write command (ASM 410) Field interference on SLG SLG is receiving interference from its environment. External interference field Distance between two SLGs is too small and does not meet configuration guidelines. Connection cable to SLG is malfunctioning, is too long or does not meet specifications. 07 07 Too many sending errors MDS was unable to correctly receive the command or the write data from the SLG even after several attempts. The MDS is positioned exactly on the boundary area of the transmission window. Data transmission to MDS is being affected by external interference. Antenna is mounted too close to metal. B-2 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Error Messages Table B-1 General errors Error Code in Hex LED Indication 08 08 Cause/Remedy CRC sending error - Monitor receiving circuit detected an error during sending. Same cause as error 06 - MDS reports CRC errors very frequently. MDS is positioned in the boundary area of SLG. MDS and/or SLG have hardware defect. 09 09 Wrong MDS type for special commands Set data carrier type with special command (type 3) 0C 12 EEPROM error Memory of the MDS cannot be written. MDS was write-accessed too often. MDS memory defective. 0D 13 Address error (address area exceeded) Specified address does not exist on MDS. Check and correct command for telegram layout. Status byte of command is not 00. 0E 14 ECC error Data could not be read from MDS. MDS data have been lost (MDS defective) MDS was not initialized with ECC driver. Initialize MDS. MDS has reached the end of its life, and the data have been lost. Replace MDS. While being write-accessed, MDS was moved out of the field or field interference occurred. MDS is not positioned correctly. Remove interference. 0F 01 Startup message of ASM. The ASM was off and still had not received a RESET command. Perform init_run The same physical ASM channel is used in two (or more) UDT 10 structures. Check ASM_address and ASM_channel in all UDT 10 structures. 0F 15 MOBY F driver error Internal error. FFT command with MDS F1xx in field. Telegram from reader cannot be interpreted. 19 25 Previous command active A new command was sent to the ASM although the last command is still active. An active command can only be terminated by a RESET command. The new command is concluded with error 19 hex. The old command is executed by the ASM and reported as finished after its execution. 1A 26 No data carrier selected or wrong MDS type MDS type was not set correctly (special commands). MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 B-3 Error Messages Table B-1 General errors Error Code in Hex LED Indication 1B 27 Cause/Remedy Telegram with checksum error received 1D 29 CRC check for data telegram not okay. Data distortion. Interface defective. Send command again. Insufficient RAM on the ASM Chained MOBY command must be divided into several commands. 1E 30 Error while processing the function block Data in FB DB are incorrect. Perform RESET command. Parameterization error: The "Typ" parameter is not 1 to 6. Parameterization error: The command in ZUWDB has an error (e.g., length = 0). ASM hardware defective: The channel module received incorrect data during RESET. 1F B-4 31 Command aborted due to RESET command MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Error Messages B.2 ASM-Related Errors B.2.1 ASM 400 with FB 250 The messages shown in table B-2 are indicated in data word 5 of FBDB. Table B-2 Error messags of FB 250 Error Message Bit 1 = "1": Synchronization error Cause/Remedy S FB 250 has received the result for a command which is not located in ZUWDB (i.e., not at this location). The pointer (ZUW) to ZUWDB may have been changed while a command was active. S EMC effects have caused the ASM to execute another command than programmed by the user. Check the entire SIMATIC system. Check the grounding concept. Bit 2 = "1": FB 250 is synchronized (SYNCH) General communication capability with a channel module of the ASM 400 module. This bit is set after a positive check of the FB parameterization. This takes place during the 1st RESET immediately after bootstrap loading of the programs and data blocks. When a RESET command does not function, the bit is not set or reset. ASM 400 module cannot be addressed by the FB. S Wrong address set on the ASM 400 S ASM 400 is defective. A RESET must always be performed after the sync bit is reset. Bit 4 = "1": Parameterization error S The "ADR" parameter does not contain the correct values. S The "KAN" parameter is specified incorrectly. Permitted values are 1 or 2. S The "TYP" parameter was specified incorrectly. Permitted values are 0, 1, 3, 5, and 6. S The "ANW" parameter is not "0" or "1". S The command is not permitted in ZUWDB. Bit 5 = "1": ASM error S The exact ASM error is located in bits 8 to 15 of ANZ. If bits 8 to 15 = 0: S The FB did not receive an acknowledgment from the ASM in time after command transfer. S FB 250 was not called by the user within 4 seconds after command start (no cycle FB call). S The user changed data in the FBDB (DW 0 to DW 24) - particularly DW 0/1. MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 B-5 Error Messages Table B-2 Error messags of FB 250 Error Message Cause/Remedy Bit 6 = "1": Loop counter monitor in FB 250 has been triggered. Time error S The command data could not be or could not be completely transferred to the ASM 400. S The ASM 400 cannot be addressed by the FB. The "ADR" parameter may not correspond to switch setting S3 on the ASM 400. S Length = 0 was transferred with a write command. S The "AG" parameter is set incorrectly. S The user has changed data in FBDB (particularly DW 0/1). Check ASM 400 hardware, addressing parameterization and user program. Bit 7 = "1": The command to the ASM 400 was repeated. Repetition error S Error in BEST = 0 The command was not concluded correctly after command repetition (not an error). S Error in BEST = 1 Communication malfunction between ASM and FB 250. Despite command repetition, the command still could not be executed correctly. When the repetition bit is set sporadically, all hardware must be checked. Special attention should be paid to the grounding concept. Bits 8 to 12 Error message as shown in table B-1 Bit 13 = "1" ECC offset was performed. Bit 14 = "1" Dialog battery has dropped below threshold value. Bit 15 = "1" RAM battery has dropped below threshold value. B-6 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Error Messages B.2.2 ASM 470 with FB 47/FC 47 The indication word for FC 47 is DBB 6/7. The indication word for FB 47 is DW 3. S MOBY errors are indicated in DBB 6 or DL 3. Cf. table B-1. S Internal errors of the function block are indicated in DBB 7 or DR 3. Cf. table B-3. The red LED does not flash for these error messages from FB 47/FC 47. The contents of the byte are specified in hexadecimal format (i.e., HEX) and as fixed point numbers (i.e., DEC). Table B-3 Error messages of FB 47/FC 47 ANZ (RightHand Byte) Description 02 HEX/ Illegal command code or command parameter was entered. 02 DEC S Parameterize data words in BEDB correctly in accordance with the 06 HEX/ S The command code and the received acknowledgment code are not 06 DEC command description. identical. S Internal processing error S BEDB is being overwritten by other program segments. 07 HEX/ Synchronization error during execution of FB 47/FC 47 07 DEC S Internal processing error S BEDB is being overwritten by other program segments. 08 HEX/ 08 DEC The parameterized user data length of the read/write command and the user data length received in the acknowledgment are not identical. 09 HEX/ The received or written user data are too long. 09 DEC S ASM 470 not parameterized correctly S Read command: The length specified for the data to be read is too S ASM 470 not parameterized correctly S BEDB is being overwritten by other program segments. long. Maximum of 12 bytes is permitted. 10 HEX/ Read or written user data length too short. User data length is 0 bytes. 10 DEC S Internal processing error S BEDB is being overwritten by other program segments. 17 HEX/ The formal operands of FB 47/FC 47 were parameterized incorrectly. 17 DEC S Parameterize FB 47/FC 47 correctly. S Then start RESET command. MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 B-7 Error Messages Table B-3 Error messages of FB 47/FC 47 ANZ (RightHand Byte) Description 19 HEX/ FB 47/FC 47 reports that only a RESET command is permitted as the next command. 19 DEC S No RESET was performed after a startup message of the ASM 470. S No RESET was performed after an error message after which a RESET must be the next command. S Start RESET command. 20 HEX/ Synchronization error between ASM 470 and FB 47/FC 47 20 DEC S The handshake of the command and acknowledgment telegrams got out of step. There may be a contact problem or the supply voltage may be unstable. S BEDB is being overwritten by other program segments. S Start RESET command. 21 HEX/ ASM 470 has performed a startup. 21 DEC S There may be a problem with the plug-in contact of the ASM 470 in the S7-300. S S S S 1 BH/ 27D1 Supply voltage of the ASM 470 is unstable. Interference pulse DEDB is being overwritten by other program segments. Start RESET command. S The data field (i.e., number of user data bytes) between DAT-Z and the end of DATDB is less than the length given in the write command (DR 4 in BEDB). Exception: DATDB consists of 256 data words (DW 0 to DW 255). S DAT-Z must be adjusted to the user data length. Make DAT-Z smaller. S Reduce length of read/write data. S Start RESET command. 1 B-8 Can only occur with FB 47 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Error Messages B.2.3 ASM 450 with FB 240 The error indications (ANZ) of FB 240 are located in data word DW 2 of the BEDB. S The MOBY errors listed in table B-1 are located in the left-hand byte of the data word (DL 2). S Internal FB errors are located in the right-hand byte of the data word (DR 2). The red LED does not flash for these FB 240 error messages. The contents of the byte are specified in binary format, in hexadecimal format (H) and as fixed point numbers (D). Table B-4 Error messages of FB 240 ANZ (RightHand Byte) 00000010 (02H/02D) Description Illegal command code or command parameter was entered. S Parameterize data words in BEDB correctly as specified in the command description. 00000110 (06H/06D) The command code and the received acknowledgment code are not identical. S Input and output area of the ASM 450 is too small. S Parameterize master module correctly. 00000111 (07H/07D) The received acknowledgment is too long. S Input and output area of the ASM 450 is too small (i.e., less than 32 bytes). S Read command: The length of the data to be read is too long. S Parameterize master module correctly. 00001000 (08H/08D) The parameterized length of the user data of the read/write command and the user data length received in the acknowledgment are not identical. S Input and output area of the ASM 450 is too small. S Parameterize master module correctly. 00001001 (09H/09D) The length of the received user data is too long. S Input and output area of the ASM 450 is too small (i.e., less than 32 bytes). S Read command: The length of the data to be read is too long. S Parameterize master module correctly. 00010001 (11H/17D) The formal operands of FB 240 were parameterized incorrectly or the parameterization in the EPROM of IM 308-B is wrong. S Parameterize FB 240 correctly. S Parameterize master module correctly. Check the "ADR" parameter in particular. S Then start RESET command. MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 B-9 Error Messages Table B-4 Error messages of FB 240 ANZ (RightHand Byte) 00010011 (13H/19D) Description FB 240 reports that only a RESET is permitted as the next command. S No RESET was performed after a startup message of the ASM 450. S No RESET was performed after an error message which requires a RESET as the next command. S Start RESET command. 00010100 (14H/20D) Synchronization error between ASM 450 and FB 240 S The handshake of the command and acknowledgment telegrams got out of step. There may be a contact problem or the supply voltage may be unstable. S Start RESET command. 00010101 (15H/21D) The ASM 450 has performed a startup or a PROFIBUS DP bus error has occurred. S Possible problem with the ASM 450's plug-in contacts in the module rack S S S S B-10 Supply voltage of the ASM 450 is unstable. Interference pulse on the reset input of base connector X1 PROFIBUS DP error occurred (e.g., bus connection interrupted) Start RESET command. MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 ASCII Table MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 C C-1 ASCII Table C-2 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Index Numbers 3RX9 802-0AA0, 6-25 3SX6 284, 5-21, 6-55 6ES5 491-0LB11, 6-11 6ES5 700-8MA11, 6-16 6ES5 700-8MA22, 6-16 6ES7 141-1BF11-0XB0, 6-46 6ES7 142-1BD21-0XB0, 6-46 6ES7 194-1AA01-0XA0, 6-25 6ES7 194-1FC00-0XA0, 6-25 6ES7 198-8FA01-8AA0, 6-48 6ES7 390-5AA00-0AA0, 6-36, 6-37 6ES7 390-5BA00-0AA0, 6-36, 6-37 6ES7 392-1AJ00-0AA0, 6-37, 6-43 6ES7 972-0BA11-0XA0, 6-55 6GT2 002-0AA00, 6-5 6GT2 002-0AB00, 6-5 6GT2 002-0BA00, 6-16 6GT2 002-0EB00, 6-25 6GT2 002-0EB20, 6-25 6GT2 002-0FA10, 6-37 6GT2 002-0GA10, 6-37 6GT2 002-0HA00, 6-47 6GT2 080-2AA10, 6-5, 6-25, 6-37, 6-47, 7-4 6GT2 090-0BB00, 6-5, 6-8 6GT2 090-0BB10, 6-5 6GT2 090-0BC00, 6-25, 6-29, 6-47 6GT2 091-0E..., 6-43 6GT2 094-0AB00, 7-11 6GT2 303-1CA00, 7-11 6GT2 303-1DA00, 7-11 6GT2 381-1AB00, 7-11 6GT2 390-0BA00, 5-11, 5-15, 6-56 6GT2 390-1AB00, 3-52, 6-55 6GT2 391-0B..., 3-56, 6-55 6GT2 391-0BH50, 3-58 6GT2 391-1AH50, 3-56, 3-58, 6-55, 6-56 6GT2 391-1BN10, 3-57, 3-58, 6-55 6GT2 391-1BN25, 3-57, 3-58, 6-55 6GT2 400-1CE00, 4-4 6GT2 400-1CF00, 4-7 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 6GT2 400-1GA00, 4-10 6GT2 400-4BF00, 4-13 6GT2 401-0AF00, 5-3 6GT2 401-2AA00, 5-26 6GT2 401-2BB00, 5-21, 6-55 6GT2 401-2CB00, 5-15 6GT2 402-2BB00, 6-55 6GT2 402-2CE00, 6-55 6GT2 402-2EA00, 6-55 6GT2 403-0BA00, 7-11 6GT2 403-1BA00, 7-11 6GT2 405-0AF00, 6-75 6GT2 405-2CB00, 6-82 6GT2 490-1AA00, 3-51, 5-4, 6-77 6GT2 491-0A..., 3-53 6GT2 491-0AH50, 3-58 6GT2 491-0AN20, 3-58 6GT2 491-0D..., 3-53, 6-23 6GT2 491-0DH50, 3-58 6GT2 491-0DN20, 3-58 6GT2 491-0E..., 3-54, 6-36 6GT2 491-0EH50, 3-58, 6-37 6GT2 491-0EN20, 3-58, 6-37 6GT2 491-0EN50, 3-58, 6-37 6GT2 491-1C..., 3-54, 6-29 6GT2 491-1CH20, 3-58, 6-25, 6-47 6GT2 491-1CH50, 3-58, 6-25, 6-47 6GT2 491-1CN20, 3-58, 6-25, 6-47 6GT2 491-1DH50, 3-55, 3-58 6GT2 491-1HH50, 3-57, 3-58, 6-55, 6-56, 7-5 6GT2 494-0AA00, 5-11, 6-54, 6-55, 6-56, 7-5 6GT2 499-1BC00, 5-11 6GT2 690-0AB00, 5-9 6GT2 691-0BH50, 3-55, 3-58 6GT2 691-0BN20, 3-55, 3-58 A Adapter floor plate for top hat rail mounting, 5-14, 5-20, 6-60, 6-89 Index-1 Index Amount of data, Transmitted based on MDS speed, 3-14 ASM 400 Address settings, 6-9 Function block FB 250, 6-7 Layout and function, 6-4 Ordering data, 6-5 Plug connectors and their assignment, 6-8 Settings on the channel module, 6-10 SIMATIC adapter capsule, 6-11 SIMATIC S5 Configuration, 6-11 Switches and plug-in jumpers, 6-9 Technical data, 6-6 ASM 410 Configuration in ET 100U/ET 200U, 6-19 Layout and function, 6-15 Ordering data, 6-16 Setting the operating mode, 6-21 Slots in PLC, 6-18 Technical data, 6-17 Wiring of one or two SLGs, 6-23 ASM 450 Dimensions, 6-31 Layout and function, 6-24 Ordering data, 6-25 Pin allocation, 6-32 PROFIBUS address and terminating resistance, 6-34 PROFIBUS configuration, 6-28 SLG connection technique, 6-28 Technical data, 6-26 ASM 452 Dimensions, 6-31 Layout and function, 6-24 Ordering data, 6-25 Pin allocation, 6-32 PROFIBUS address and terminating resistance, 6-34 PROFIBUS configuration, 6-28 SLG connection technique, 6-28 Technical data, 6-26 ASM 470 Installation of the software, 6-44 Layout and function, 6-35 Ordering data, 6-37 Technical data, 6-38 Wiring to the SLG, 6-43 Index-2 ASM 473 Configuration, 6-49 Dimensions, 6-53 Hardware configuration, 6-51 Layout and function, 6-46 Ordering data, 6-47 Pin assignment, 6-52 SLG connection, 6-51 Technical data, 6-47 ASM 475 Layout and function, 6-36 Installation of the software, 6-44 Ordering data, 6-37 Technical data, 6-38 Wiring to the SLG, 6-43 ASM 824 Adapter floor plate for top hat rail mounting, 6-60 Dimensions, 6-60 Layout and function, 6-54 Ordering data, 6-55 Pin allocations and switches, 6-58 Technical data, 6-57 ASM 850 Adapter floor plate for top hat rail mounting, 6-60 Dimensions, 6-60 Layout and function, 6-54 Ordering data, 6-55 Pin allocations and switches, 6-58 Technical data, 6-57 ASM 854 Adapter floor plate for top hat rail mounting, 6-60 Dimensions, 6-60 Layout and function, 6-55 Ordering data, 6-55 Pin allocations and switches, 6-58 Technical data, 6-57 C C library MFWAPI, 7-4 MOBY API, 7-4 Cable configuration, 3-48 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Index Cables, Shielding, 3-42 Chemical resistance of the mobile data memories, 3-27 Communication Between ASM and user program, 3-8 Between ASM, SLG/SLA and MDS F4xx, 3-7 Concept of shielding, 3-46 Connection cables, 3-53 LEDs for MOBY, 6-52 LEDs for PROFIBUS DP, 6-52 MDS F125 Dimensions, 4-8 Field data, 4-8 Metal-free space, 4-9 Ordering data, 4-7 Technical data, 4-7 MDS F160 Dimension, 4-11 Field data, 4-11 Metal-free space, 4-12 Ordering data, 4-10 Technical data, 4-10 MDS F415 Dimensions, 4-15 Field data, 4-14 Memory organization, 4-14 Metal-free space, 4-15 Ordering data, 4-13 Technical data, 4-13 Metal-free space, 3-16 Flush mounting of antenna in metal, 3-17 Flush mounting of the SLG 82 in metal, 3-18 Mounting of antenna on metal, 3-17 MFWAPI, 7-4 MOBY API, 7-4 MOBY Hand-Held Terminal STG F Hardware, 7-10 Layout and function, 7-8 Ordering data, 7-11 System prerequisites, 7-9 Technical data, 7-11 MOBY wide range power pack Dimensions, 7-7 Ordering data, 7-5 Plug connector allocation of 24 V output, 7-6 Technical data, 7-5 Mounting clamp, 5-25 M P MDS F124 Dimensions, 4-5 Field data, 4-5 Metal-free space, 4-6 Ordering data, 4-4 Technical data, 4-4 Plug connector allocations, 3-49 D Data structure of the MOBY F data memory MDS F1xx, 6-66 MDS F4xx, 6-62 Documentation Operator control guides, A-1 Technical descriptions, A-1 E EMC basic rules, 3-44 EMC guidelines, 3-29 Avoiding interference sources, 3-39 FFT command, 3-34 Equipotential bonding, 3-40 F FFT command, 3-34 Field data, 3-11, 6-67 L MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618 Index-3 Index S SIM 80 ANT F5 Definition of distance D, 6-80 Dimensions, 6-81 Field data, 6-77 Layout and function, 6-61 Metal-free space, 6-79 Ordering data, 6-75 Technical data, 6-76 Transmission window, 6-79 SIM 82 Adapter floor plate for top hat rail mounting, 6-89 Definition of distance D, 6-86 Dimensions, 6-88 Field data, 6-84 Layout and function, 6-61 Metal-free space, 6-85 Ordering data, 6-82 Pin allocations and switches, 6-86 Technical data, 6-82 Transmission window, 6-84 SLA 81 Definition of distance D, 5-24 Dimensions, 5-24 Field data, 5-22 Metal-free space, 5-23 Mounting clamp, 5-25 Ordering data, 5-21 Technical data, 5-21 Transmission window, 5-23 SLA 82 Definition of the distance D, 5-29 Dimensions, 5-29 Field data, 5-27 Metal-free space, 5-28 Ordering data, 5-26 Technical data, 5-26 Transmission window, 5-28 Index-4 SLG 80 ANT F5 Adapter floor plate for top hat rail mounting, 5-20 Definition of distance D, 5-7 Dimensions, 5-8 Field data, 5-5 Metal-free space, 5-6 Ordering data, 5-3 Technical data, 5-3 Transmission window, 5-6 SLG 82 Definition of distance D, 5-18 Dimensions, 5-19 Field data, 5-17 Metal-free space, 5-17 Ordering data, 5-15 Pin allocations and switches, 5-18 Technical data, 5-15 Transmission window, 5-17 SLG 82 basic device Adapter floor plate for top hat rail mounting, 5-14 Dimensions, 5-14 Ordering data, 5-11 Pin allocations and switches, 5-13 Technical data, 5-12 Software MOBY, 7-2 Ordering data, 7-4 Spacer kit for MOBY F ANT F5, 5-9 Stecker, Bestelldaten, 3-51, 3-52 T Transmission window, 3-3 Effects of metal, 3-19 Reduction of metallic effects, 3-24 Transmit period of the MDS, 3-6 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual ( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618